JP7226396B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a storage section for storing game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and directed to a game area in response to a player's shooting operation. is fired. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. be.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals is betted and a new game is started by operating a start lever, a lottery process is executed by a control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2020-044062 A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 terminates the continuation criterion information stored in the continuation criterion storage means when the game is executed in an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player and an update opportunity occurs. information updating means for updating information on the approaching side;
terminating means for terminating the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the continuation criterion information becomes the termination information;
State continuation means for continuing the advantageous game state without terminating the advantageous game state by the termination means even if the continuation reference information becomes the end information when a predetermined performance execution situation exists in the advantageous game state. and,
means for updating the continuation reference information so as to move away from the end information based on the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity in the advantageous gaming state;
Although the continuation reference information has become the end information in the advantageous gaming state, if the predetermined opportunity occurs in the situation where the advantageous gaming state is continued due to the predetermined effect execution situation, the predetermined opportunity means for generating a notification corresponding to the fact that the continuation reference information has been updated to a side away from the end information in response to the generation, when the predetermined performance execution situation ends;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized through the display window; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; (a) It is a front view of a common display area, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on a combined display part. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device and the display content of the stop order on the combined display unit; FIG. 1 is an electrical configuration diagram of a slot machine; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a lottery process for a winning combination executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination lottery table when betting 3 coins; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination lottery table when two cards are bet; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order in which the reels are stopped and the winning mode to be established; 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a corresponding process at the end of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game state and the game section that exist in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing advantageous state processing at the start of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-bonus process executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT state processing at the start of a game executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing for AT performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display effect corresponding to the base effect of the AT state on the image display device, and (b) an example of a display effect corresponding to the false portent state or the main portent state on the image display device. (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display effect corresponding to the end of the AT state in the image display device. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how an effect corresponding to a precursory state progresses. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination of symbols that result in a normal replay winning prize, a first special replay winning prize, and a second special replay winning prize in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination lottery table when betting 3 coins; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order in which the reels are stopped and the winning mode to be established; (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining how a notification prompting establishment of a first special replay prize is made on the main line, and (b) A notification prompting establishment of a second special replay prize is made on the main line. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of being separated; It is a flowchart which shows the stop order notification control process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the information control processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-bonus process executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing winning determination processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) to (k) are time charts showing operation details when a first special replay winning prize or a second special replay winning prize is established in each game state. 14 is a flow chart showing winning determination processing executed by the main MPU in the third embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing AT state processing at the start of a game, which is executed by the main MPU in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing processing for an add-on period executed by the main MPU; FIG. A mode of selection of the number of grants when an extra lottery process for the extra period is executed with reference to the lottery table for the first extra period, and an extra lottery for the extra period with reference to the lottery table for the second extra period. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of selecting the number of grants when processing is executed; (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution contents of effects executed by the image display device during the first addition period. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution contents of effects executed by the image display device during the second addition period. FIG. 4 is an electrical configuration diagram for enabling image display in a first additional period and a second additional period; It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation setting process for additional periods performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display control processing for additional periods performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing drawing processing of divided images executed in VDP; FIG. FIG. 8A to FIG. 9D are explanatory diagrams for explaining how drawing data is created in a drawing target frame area of a frame buffer by executing drawing processing of divided images; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing divided image drawing processing executed in the VDP in the fifth embodiment. FIG.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine 10, which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. A plurality of wooden panels are fixed to the housing 11 so that the housing 11 is formed into a box-like shape that is open forward as a whole.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 as shown in FIGS. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 with a shaft portion 15 provided on the left side of the housing 11 as a rotation axis. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the rear side thereof.

A game panel 20 is provided near the upper center portion of the front door 12 as shown in FIG. The game panel 20 has three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M and 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and the reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are each formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that its center axis coincides with the rotation axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R one-to-one. there is Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected through the respective display windows 21L, 21M, 21R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20 as shown in FIG. When the start lever 41 is operated when a predetermined number or more of game media (or game value), which are either medals or virtual medals, are betted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The respective stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively. Each of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44 is in a state in which it can be stopped after a predetermined time has passed since the left reel 32L started rotating.

The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating based on the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44. One game (game cycle) is performed until the execution of various processes such as the granting of and the management of the game state is completed.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back of the front door 12 when reception is permitted, and are guided to the hopper device 53 when reception is prohibited. The medals are led to a medal receiving tray 59 from a medal discharge port 58 provided in the front lower portion of the front door 12 (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a prize corresponding to the awarding of game media is established on the main line ML, which will be described later. have. Below the medal slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 is provided to be pushed when the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 52. As shown in FIG.

On the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R are a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum amount of credited virtual medals that can be betted at once, and a button for inserting two virtual medals at once. A second credit input button 48 is provided. In this slot machine 10, there are situations where the number of game media (medals or virtual medals) that can be betted (that is, bet setting) at one time is "3" and "2".

The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and three or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of decreasing the number of virtual medals by three. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and two or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by two. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "2", and one or more virtual tokens are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by one. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by two. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by one.

If the number of stored virtual medals is less than the difference between the current bet number and the bettable number, and the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, the bet number will be the number of virtual medals. The number of virtual medals is increased, and the number of virtual medals becomes zero.

The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by two. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by one. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by two. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by one.

When the second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of stored virtual medals is one and the current bet number is "0", the bet number will be "1". At the same time, the number of virtual medals becomes zero.

The first credit insertion button 47 has a wider pressing surface than the second credit insertion button 48 when the player operates the button. Thereby, the operability of the first credit insertion button 47 is enhanced.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41 . The slot machine 10 has a credit function of accumulating and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement button 51 is operated under the condition that the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 58 as real medals.

A power supply device 54 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 53 as shown in FIGS. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a set value of the slot machine 10 from "1" to "6". , a setting key insertion hole 57 into which a setting key owned by the manager of the game hall is inserted and operated is provided.

Next, the symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 4 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, numbers "0" to "20" are assigned to the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are visible from the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R of the main controller 70, which will be described later. It is a number for recognizing the symbol in a state of being in a bad state, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (eg, 20th on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (eg, 19th on the left reel 32L), a “watermelon” symbol (eg, 18th on the left reel 32L), and “ Red 7" symbol (e.g., 15th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol (for example, the 5th on the left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of various symbols are different for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIG. 5 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R. Each of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

In this slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect positions where symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols of the right reel 32R. The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started to rotate in a state where a predetermined number or more of game media are betted, and when a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of giving the game media. , the benefit of replaying, or the transition of the game state.

That is, in the present slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which winning can be established. The main line ML is set as a straight line. Therefore, a subline SL1 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R. A subline SL3 connecting a connected subline SL2, a lower pattern of the left reel 32L, a lower pattern of the middle reel 32M, and a lower pattern of the right reel 32R, a lower pattern of the left reel 32L, a middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R. Winning is not established even if a winning combination is established on a straight line such as a sub-line SL4 connecting the upper symbols of .

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning.

The small winnings to which the game media are given include the first compensation winning, the second compensation winning, the third compensation winning, the fourth compensation winning, the fifth compensation winning, the sixth compensation winning, the seventh compensation winning, and the eighth compensation winning. There are supplemental prizes, ninth supplemental prizes, first bell prizes, second bell prizes, first watermelon prizes, second watermelon prizes and cherry prizes. Specifically, in the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" symbol, It will be the first supplementary prize. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the second compensation winning prize becomes. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the third compensation winning prize becomes. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, the fourth supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "BAR" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the fifth supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "BAR" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "Bell" symbol, the sixth supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white 7" symbol, the seventh compensation winning prize becomes. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the eighth compensation winning prize becomes. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "white 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the ninth compensation prize is won. becomes. If any one of the first to ninth supplementary prizes is won, the number of game media to be awarded becomes “1”.

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the first bell wins. becomes. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second bell wins. becomes. When either the first bell prize or the second bell prize is won, the number of game media to be given becomes “15”.

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol on the main line ML, the first watermelon wins. becomes. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the second watermelon wins. becomes. When either the first watermelon prize or the second watermelon prize is won, the number of game media to be given becomes “5”. When the stopped symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "cherry" symbol, the cherry prize is won regardless of whether the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is. In the case of winning a cherry prize, the number of game media to be given becomes “2”.

Winnings that give the privilege of replaying the next game without betting game media include normal replay winnings, first chance replay winnings, and second chance replay winnings. Specifically, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the main line On the ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, on the main line ML When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, or the left reel on the main line ML. When the stopped symbol on the reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the normal replay prize is won. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the first chance replay. Win a prize. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second chance replay. Win a prize.

If any of the above replay wins are made, a replay privilege is given that allows the player to play the next game without betting the game medium. Specifically, if any of the replay wins in the game in which "3" game media are betted, the betting of the game media is not required, and the next game is started with the "3" game media being betted. A game can be started. In addition, if any of the replay wins in the game in which the game medium "2" is betted, the play of the next game is started with the game medium "2" betted, while the game medium is not required to be wagered. It becomes possible to

A first CB prize and a second CB prize are available as state transition prizes in which only game state transitions are performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "White 7" symbol. If there is, it will be the 1st CB prize. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol, 2CB award. When the first CB win is established, the game state shifts to the first CB state ST2, and when the second CB win is established, the game state shifts to the second CB state ST3 (see FIG. 19).

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are gaming states in which when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning of a minor combination stops on the main line ML, medals are paid out as a winning regardless of whether there is a winning combination. For example, even if the win flag corresponding to the first bell win is not set to "1", if the combination of symbols corresponding to the first bell win stops on the main line ML, the game medium will be sent to the player. Granted. On the other hand, the replay winning prize is established on the condition that the corresponding combination is won in the lottery.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, reel control different from that in the non-CB state is performed. In the non-CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled so that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. In other words, in the non-CB state, reel control is performed for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop the reels within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. On the other hand, in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are controlled as described above, that is, the same reel control as in the normal game, but the left reel 32L is not controlled. As for the left reel 32L, reel control is performed such that the left reel 32L is slid only up to one symbol after the left stop button 42 is operated. That is, in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the left reel 32L is reel-controlled to stop within a specified time (75 msec) shorter than the specified time after the left stop button 42 is operated.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the reel control to slide only up to one symbol is not limited to the left reel 32L, and the reel corresponding to the first operated stop button is the maximum reel. Control may be performed to allow only one symbol to slide, or reel control may be performed to allow only a maximum of one symbol to slide only on predetermined reels. Furthermore, a stop operated in a certain order is performed such that the reel corresponding to the stop button operated second or the stop button operated last is controlled to slide only up to one symbol. Reel control may be performed such that the reel corresponding to the button is slid only for a maximum of one symbol.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, when a winning combination corresponding to the replay winning is won, the replay winning is given priority, and when the replay winning is not possible, the first bell winning can be established. Also, the first bell winning can be established even when the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning has not been won.

Both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states in which the game media owned by the player are not increased. Furthermore, in both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the relevant game state is greater than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the relevant game state. It is a game state in which the number of is reduced.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

Above the front door 12, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, and an image display device 63 are provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, light emission of the upper lamp 61 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and light emission is controlled in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light emission effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair of left and right speakers, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the sound output is controlled so that a sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and a sound or voice corresponding to the winning result is output. Sound output is controlled so that Further, the speaker 62 is controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, or it may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, display control is performed so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 63 is controlled to display on the display surface images corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game. That is, the image display device 63 executes a display effect.

On the game panel 20 of the front door 12, below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of stored virtual medals, and a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of virtual medals to be awarded when a small winning combination is won. In order to display the number of game media, perform display corresponding to the notified content when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63, and further notify the management result of the game history. and a section display section 67 for displaying corresponding to the fact that the game section is the second section. The credit display section 65 is composed of a 7-segment display, and each segment uses a monochromatic LED such as green.

FIG. 7A is a front view of a common display area 68 provided with a combined display section 66 and a section display section 67. FIG. In the common display area 68, as shown in FIG. 7(a), a shared display section 66 in which two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are arranged side by side, and a section display section consisting of one light emitting section. 67 are aggregated.

When any of the small wins (1st to 9th compensation wins, 1st bell wins, 2nd bell wins, 1st watermelon wins, 2nd watermelon wins or cherry wins) corresponding to the provision of game media is established , the combined display unit 66 displays the number of given game media corresponding to the small winning combination when the game in which the small winning combination is established is finished. Specifically, when any one of the first to ninth compensation winnings is established in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "1" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. By being displayed, it is notified that the game media of "1" have been awarded. When either the first bell win or the second bell win is established in the non-CB state, "1" is displayed on the left 7-segment display 66a and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. By being displayed, it is notified that "15" game media have been provided. Further, when either the first watermelon winning prize or the second watermelon winning prize is established in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. By doing so, it is notified that "5" game media have been awarded. In addition, when a cherry prize is won in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden, and '2' is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b, whereby the game medium of '2' is displayed. is given.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the number of game media provided by winning a small winning combination is "1". Therefore, when a small win is established in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "1" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. By doing so, it is notified that the game medium of "1" has been provided.

On the other hand, even if a winning such as a replay winning or a CB winning that does not give a game medium is established, the display corresponding to the winning is not displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. The 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are maintained in a non-display state. The display of the number of given game media on the dual-use display unit 66 is ended when the game media are betted to start the next game after the game in which the display is performed, and each 7-segment display is displayed at this bet timing. The devices 66a and 66b are in a non-display state.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported on the image display device 63, information corresponding to the reported stop order is displayed on the combined display section 66. FIG. FIG. 7(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the dual-use display section 66. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7B, in the slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order indicated by the image display device 63. The first stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop is the middle reel. 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop. is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is The stop order is the left reel 32L, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop. The stop order where the second stop is the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the stop order where the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are optional, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest are There is a stop order that is arbitrary and a stop order where the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary.

The notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 is made when a winning combination including the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth complementary winning data is won in the winning lottery process in the non-CB state, or It can be executed when a winning combination containing any of the seventh to ninth complementary winning data as well as the second bell winning data is won. Specifically, when winning a combination that includes the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth complementary winning data, the reel 32L is selected in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. , 32M, and 32R are stopped, the first bell winning is established, and if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the order of stopping corresponding to the winning combination of this time, the first to sixth compensation winnings are established. Either can be established. When the first bell win is established, as already explained, "15" game media are given to the player. of game media is given to the player.

When a winning combination including the second bell winning data and any of the seventh to ninth complementary winning data is won, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are played in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the order of stopping corresponding to the winning combination of this time, any one of the seventh to ninth complementary winnings is established. obtain. When the second bell win is established, as already explained, "15" game media are given to the player. of game media is given to the player.

When any one of the stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a of the dual-use display unit 66 is maintained in a non-display state, while the right 7-segment display 66b is maintained. , a display corresponding to the stop order of the notification targets is performed. The contents of this display are as shown in FIG. 7(b), and the display contents of the stop order on the combined display unit 66 are set in one-to-one correspondence with the notification contents of the stop order on the image display device 63. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of display contents on the dual-purpose display unit 66 are set so as to correspond to part or all of the notification contents of the stop order on the image display device 63. good too.

The display contents of the stop order on the dual-purpose display section 66 are different from the display contents to be displayed when the dual-purpose display section 66 displays a display corresponding to the provision of game media. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the dual-use display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media provided or to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the content of notification of the order of stopping on the image display device 63 and the content of display of the order of stopping on the dual-purpose display section 66. FIG.

When the image display device 63 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and image display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in each of the unit display images G1 to G3. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 8(a) shows how the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The left unit display image G1 displays an image "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, and the middle unit display image G2 displays an image "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M. , an image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R is displayed on the right unit display image G3.

While the image display device 63 displays an image notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, the combined display unit 66 displays the reels as shown in FIG. 8(b). An "L" is displayed corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R. That is, in the image display device 63, the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed in the stopping order. While the corresponding image display is performed, the combined display section 66 performs display irrelevant to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the display contents on the image display device 63 even if the display corresponding to the notification contents of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed on the combined display section 66 .

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63 . Also from this point, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66 compared to the image display device 63 . In addition, the dual-purpose display section 66 is located on the side opposite to the image display device 63 with the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R visible. As a result, the combined display section 66 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the image display device 63 , and this also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display section 66 .

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63 This display is started after the winning lottery process is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is validated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 is started earlier than the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63. However, these displays may start at the same time or substantially at the same time, and the display start order may be reversed. The display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is a stop command for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which the display is executed. is terminated when

The shared display section 66 is arranged on the central side of the common display area 68 , while the section display section 67 is arranged on the corner side of the common display area 68 . The section display section 67 is a display section for notifying that the game section is the second section SC2 out of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2 (see FIG. 19). The second section SC2 includes the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of a winning that is advantageous to the player when a winning combination to be established is different according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result of the notification of the stop order, the expected value of acquisition of game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media betted in one game" from the "expected number of game media to be awarded in one game") becomes "0 ” (specifically, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5) can be started and the advantageous game state can be continued. On the other hand, the first section SC1 is a section in which the advantageous gaming state does not start and the advantageous gaming state does not continue.

The interval display section 67 is displayed when winning a combination with different winnings to be established according to the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or a combination with different winnings depending on the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which enables establishment of a prize advantageous to the player, is notified to the player, so that when the expected value of acquisition of the game medium exceeds "0", the lighting state is established. becomes. In this case, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 correspond to the advantageous gaming state, while the second section SC2, which is neither the pseudo-bonus state ST4 nor the AT state ST5, does not correspond to the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when the first section SC1 shifts to the second section SC2, the section display section 67 may or may not switch from the off state to the on state. When the section display unit 67 is maintained in the off state when the transition to the second section SC2 is performed, when the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 is started in the second section SC2, the section display unit 67 is turned off from the off state. Lights up. When the section display portion 67 is in the lighting state, the lighting state is maintained until the second section SC2 ends, and when the second section SC2 ends and transitions to the first section SC1, the section display section 67 is turned off. Become.

As described above, once the section display section 67 is turned on in the second section SC2, the lighting state is maintained until the second section SC2 ends. The shared display unit 66 is turned on when a game medium is awarded and turned off when the next game starts, and the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed on the image display device 63. When the game is finished, it is turned on and turned off when the game ends. Therefore, in a configuration in which the interval display portion 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 so as not to be too conspicuous to the player, only the interval display portion 67 is displayed in the common display area 68 in the second interval SC2. It is possible to positively create a lighting state, which facilitates confirmation of the section display section 67 for the manager of the game hall.

Instead of maintaining the lighting state of the section display section 67 during the second section SC2, the section display section 67 may blink at a predetermined cycle during the second section SC2. Further, as the combined display section 66 and the section display section 67, other displays such as a liquid crystal display device may be used.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, a main controller 70 is provided above the reel unit 31 as shown in FIG. The main controller 70 is attached to the back plate 11b that forms the rear portion of the housing 11. As shown in FIG. The main controller 70 is constructed by housing a main control board 71 in a board box 81 . An MPU 72 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one plate surface of the main control board 71 . The board box 81 is formed transparent so that the MPU 72 accommodated in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81 . Although the board box 81 is formed colorless and transparent, it may be formed colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 accommodated in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 in the board box 81 so that the facing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10 . Therefore, by opening the front door 12 toward the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 to expose the internal space of the housing 11, it becomes possible to see the opposing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 and It is possible to see the MPU 72 through the opposing wall portion 82 .

The substrate box 81 is formed by assembling a plurality of case bodies back and forth, and these plurality of case bodies are provided with an adhesive to prevent the case bodies from separating and to leave a trace when the case bodies are separated. A coupling portion 83 is provided. A plurality of coupling portions 83 are arranged side by side on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped board box 81 . As a result, in a state in which separation of the case body is prevented by using some of the joints 83, even if the case body is separated by destroying the part of the joints 83, another joint may be used after that. By connecting 83, separation of the case body can be prevented again. In addition, when the case body is separated, the connecting portion 83 is destroyed and a trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the case body is being separated illegally by visually checking the connecting portion 83. Become. A sealing seal 84 is attached to a side of the substrate box 81 other than the side on which the coupling portions 83 are arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the sealing seal 84 is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body. As a result, when the sealing seal 84 is peeled off when the case body is separated, it is possible to leave a trace of it.

The slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70, as shown in FIG. The effect control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 63 on the front door 12 . The effect control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61 , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 based on commands received from the main control device 70 . In addition, the production control device 90 has a control board housed in a board box in the same manner as the main control device 70 .

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main controller 70 as already described. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 72, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73. A RAM 74, a random number circuit 75 for sequentially updating random numbers within a predetermined numerical range based on a clock signal output from the clock circuit, and a clock circuit for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency are provided. In addition, the MPU 72 also incorporates an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 72 includes the reel unit 31, a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, and 44a that individually detect the operation of each of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44, and a medal insertion sensor. Inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted through slot 45, credit insertion detection sensors 47a and 48a for individually detecting operation of credit insertion buttons 47 and 48, and settlement detection sensor 51a for detecting operation of settlement button 51. , a payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, a reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54, a setting key detection sensor that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57, and the like. are connected, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 72 .

The output side of the MPU 72 is connected to the reel unit 31, the selector drive section 52a provided in the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the combined display section 66, the section display section 67, the effect control device 90, and the like. In each game, the MPU 72 controls the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R of the reel unit 31. FIG. The selector 52 guides the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 to the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if reception is permitted, and to the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if reception is prohibited. It has a function of ejecting to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the The selector drive unit 52a has a function of switching the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state. and a position for prohibiting reception. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state by switching the output state and the stop state of the driving signal to the selector driving section 52a.

The MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when a small winning combination is established and medals are to be paid out. Further, the MPU 72 controls display of the combined display unit 66 so that the number of game media to be awarded is displayed when game media are awarded. Further, the MPU 72 performs display control of the section display unit 67 so that the notification of the second section SC2 is performed when the notification start trigger occurs in the case of the second section SC2. Further, the MPU 72 controls the dual-use display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the game management result is displayed. Further, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the effect control device 90 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to the effect control device 90 for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the image display device 63. In this case, display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, the direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the performance control device 90 , while the direct display control of the combined display section 66 is performed by the MPU 72 . That is, for the image display device 63, which is subject to relatively complicated display control, direct display control is performed by the effect control device 90, and the combined display unit 66, which is subject to relatively simple display control. Direct display control is executed in the MPU 72 for . As a result, it is possible to perform both a display that emphasizes the improvement of attention to the presentation and a display that emphasizes reliability while reducing the processing load of the MPU 72 .

An input side of the MPU 72 is connected to a power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply 54 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit. A power failure signal is output to the MPU 72 when the voltage is below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes power failure processing upon receiving the power failure signal, and after the power is restored, it is possible to return to the processing state before the power failure. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power-off power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power-off power when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted. As a result, even when the supply of operating power from the external power source is interrupted, data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in a situation where backup power can be supplied to the power supply unit during a power failure (for example, for one or two days). be done.

The performance control device 90 includes a performance control board 91 for controlling execution of various notifications and various performances. An MPU 92 is mounted on the effect control board 91 . The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. A RAM 94 is built in, and a clock circuit for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are also built in.

Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips. In addition, the RAM 94 is not supplied with backup power from the power supply section of the power supply unit 54 when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, but the RAM 94 is supplied with backup power. good too.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 as already described, and receives various commands from the MPU 72 . An upper lamp 61 , a speaker 62 and an image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92 . Based on commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63, thereby performing various notifications and various effects. let it happen.

In addition to the MPU 92, the effect control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like, although not shown. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the image display device 63 . The VDP intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM, reads image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing, and causes the image display device 63 to display the image data. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the image display device 63 . This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63 . When the MPU 92 determines the execution contents of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 stores a drawing list indicating the contents of the image corresponding to each update timing in the VDP according to the determined execution contents of the effect. Output. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and uses the read image data to create display data in the video RAM. Then, the VDP outputs an image signal corresponding to the generated display data to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73 and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 will be referred to as the main MPU 72, main ROM 73 and main RAM 74 respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93 and RAM 94 of the effect control device 90 will be referred to as the effect side. They are referred to as an MPU 92, an effect-side ROM 93, and an effect-side RAM 94.

Next, processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, first, an initialization process is executed (step S101). In the initialization process, interrupts by the timer interrupt process are permitted, and various initial settings are made for the registers and I/O devices in the main MPU 72 . After that, it is determined whether or not the power is turned on while the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on (step S102). If the power has been turned on while the ON operation was performed using the setting key (step S102: YES), if the reset button 56 was not pressed when the power was turned on (step S103: NO), After executing the partial clear process (step S104), the set value update process is executed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: YES), after executing the all clear process (step S105), the set value update process is executed (step S106). Partial clear processing (step S104) initializes a partial area of the main RAM 74, and all clear processing (step S105) initializes the entire area of the main RAM 74. FIG. In the partial clear process, the area other than the area where the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" and initialized, and in the all clear process, all areas including the area where the second CB winning data is stored are stored. The area is cleared to "0" and initialized.

In the set value update process, the current set value is read under the condition that the set key is inserted and turned on, and the current set value is displayed on the credit display section 65 . When the set value update process is executed, since either the partial clear process (step S104) or the all clear process (step S105) has been executed before that, a credit is displayed at the start of the set value update process. A display corresponding to the fact that the set value is "1" is displayed in the portion 65. FIG. In the set value update process, the set value is updated by “1” each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display section 65 . If the reset button 56 is operated while the set value is "6", the set value is updated to "1". When the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the set value selected at that time becomes the set value set in the current set value update processing, and the set value update processing ends. do. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display section 65 is terminated. After that, the process shifts to normal processing (step S107). The normal processing will be explained later in detail.

If the ON operation of the setting key has not been performed in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process from step S108 onward is executed. The power restoration process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power shutdown. In the power recovery process, it is determined whether or not the setting values of the slot machine 10 are normal by checking the main RAM 74 (step S108). Specifically, when the set value is any one of "1" to "6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S109). A power failure flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and when the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped, the power failure flag is set to "1". is set. If the power failure flag is set to "1", it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S110). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to confirm whether the value is normal.

If affirmative determination is made in all of steps S108 to S110, it means that the power failure processing at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, by writing the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 74 to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 and returning the data saved in the main RAM 74 to the register of the main MPU 72, the register of the main MPU 72 The state is restored to the state before the power was cut off (step S111). Also, the power failure flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S112). After that, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery process to the effect side MPU 92 (step S113), it returns to the address before the power shutdown (step S114).

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in any of steps S108 to S110, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibition process, execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S115), and all the output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0", thereby all actuators connected to the output ports are cleared. is turned off (step S116), and an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S117). And it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 milliseconds.

In the register saving process (step S201), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. FIG. In step S202, it is checked whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1", and if the power failure flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203 to execute power failure processing.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply 54 is input to the main MPU 72 . In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74 . After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal is calculated and stored in the main RAM 74, and subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If the power failure flag is not set to "1" in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S205, the main MPU 72 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S206, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors provided for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In step S207, sensor monitoring processing is performed to read the states of various sensors connected to the input port and to monitor whether the read results are normal. In step S208, timer subtraction processing is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S209, counter processing for outputting the result of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts to the outside is performed. In step S210, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the MPU 92 on the production side is performed. In step S211, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S212, the values of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 are returned to the corresponding registers in the main MPU 72, respectively.

In step S213, a management process is executed for managing the game history and displaying the content corresponding to the management result on the combined display section 66. FIG. Specifically, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section SC2, which will be described later, to the total number of games is calculated, and the ratio of the calculation result is displayed on the combined display section 66. FIG. In this case, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section SC2 to the total number of games may be calculated for each set value. In this configuration, even if the set value is changed, the calculation may be continued without initializing the information of the ratio performed for each set value. After that, in step S214, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S301). After that, start waiting processing is executed (step S302). In the start waiting process, if any of the replay wins have been established in the previous game, the bet setting of the same number as the previous bet number is set by the bet number setting counter 74a provided in the main side RAM 74 (see FIG. 9). set to The bet number setting counter 74a is a counter for specifying the number of bets for the game to be executed by the main MPU 72 . If no replay winning has been established in the previous game, if the current gaming state is not the second CB state ST3, the upper limit bet number for the current game is set to "3", and the current gaming state is the second CB state. If it is the 2CB state ST3, "2" is set as the maximum bet number for this game. On the condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is not the current bet upper limit number, it is determined whether or not there are one or more virtual medals stored and a valid bet operation has been performed. The main RAM 74 is provided with a credit counter 74b (see FIG. 9) as an area for storing the number of virtual medals stored. If a valid bet operation is performed when the value of the credit counter 74b is 1 or more, a bet setting process is executed.

In the bet setting process, when the first credit input button 47 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of bets, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is changed. In addition to setting the bet upper limit number, the value corresponding to the number of virtual medals used for the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than the bet upper limit number. If so, the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0" after adding the value of the credit counter 74b to the bet number setting counter 74a. In addition, in the bet amount setting process, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet amount setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is 2 or more, the value of the bet amount setting counter 74a is is set to "2", the value for the number of virtual medals used for the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than 2 If so, the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0" after adding the value of the credit counter 74b to the bet number setting counter 74a.

In the start waiting process, when one medal is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a due to the insertion of medals into the medal slot 45, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is the bet upper limit. If it is less than the number, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is incremented by 1, and if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is equal to or greater than the bet upper limit number, the value of the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1. When the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is greater than or equal to the upper limit bet number and the value of the credit counter 74b is greater than or equal to the upper limit stored memory number (specifically, "50"), acceptance prohibition processing is executed. By executing the reception prohibiting process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is ejected to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

In the start waiting process, if the settlement button 51 is operated, the settlement process is executed. In the settlement process, the hopper device 53 is operated so that the number of medals corresponding to the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is discharged to the medal receiving tray 59 unless the replay winning has been established. Drive control. In this case, the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" and the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0". On the other hand, after the replay winning has been established, the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the number of medals corresponding to the value of the credit counter 74b is discharged to the medal receiving tray 59. In this case, the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

After the start waiting process is executed in step S302, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for starting the game has been set (step S303). If a negative determination is made in step S303, the process returns to step S302. If an affirmative determination is made in step S303, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S302.

If the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304: YES), after the main line ML is activated, reception prohibition processing is executed (step S305). By executing the reception prohibiting process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is ejected to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

After that, in step S306, a setting process at the time of starting for performing various settings when the game is started is executed, and in step S307, a winning lottery process for performing a lottery for the winning combination in the current game is executed. , in step S308, a reel control process is executed to drive and control the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the current combination.

After that, medium application processing is executed (step S309). In the medium awarding process, when a minor winning combination has been established in the current game, a process for awarding the player with a number of game media corresponding to the winning of the minor winning combination is executed. Specifically, when virtual medals are awarded, a value corresponding to the current minor winning combination is added to the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74, and when the value of the credit counter 74b reaches the upper limit storage memory number. drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit storage memory number is paid out to the medal receiving tray 59 . In addition, in the medium provision process, display control is performed on the combined display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the number of game media to be provided this time is performed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the combined display section 66 is continued until a new bet of game media is made.

After that, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state and the game section corresponding to the result of the current game (step S310). Also, an external output setting process for outputting the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the gaming hall is executed (step S311). Thereafter, reception permission processing is executed (step S312). By executing the acceptance permission process, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

Next, the winning lottery process executed in step S307 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S401, a random number used for judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. The slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 41 is operated, the random number at that time is latched from the random number circuit 75 . The random number circuit 75 generates a random number from “0” to “65535”, and the main MPU 72 stores the latched value in the random number circuit 75 in the main RAM 74 when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The random number circuit 75 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, the lottery table for judging the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S402). In this slot machine 10, six levels of setting values from "1" to "6" are prepared in advance. It is possible to set whether the lottery process for the winning combination is to be executed based on the winning probability corresponding to which set value. A set value of "n+1" is more advantageous to the player than "n" in winning probability. Specifically, the set value of "n+1" is more advantageous to the player than the set value of "n" because the winning probability of the predetermined combination is higher than that of "n". . Also, even if the set values are the same level, the number of betted game media of "3" is more advantageous for the player than the number of bets of "2". In addition, there are a first CB state ST2 and a second CB state ST3 as game states. In step S402, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value, the current bet number, and the current gaming state is selected.

The lottery table in the non-CB state will be described using the case where the set value is "3" as an example. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combination lottery table when betting 3 cards, which is selected when the number of bets is "3", and FIG. 15 is selected when the number of bets is "2". FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination lottery table when two cards are bet; In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 16 will be referred to as appropriate.

The index value IV is set in the combination lottery table as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 regardless of whether 3 coins are bet or 2 coins are bet. Each index value IV is associated with winning data (that is, a winning combination), and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding index value IV in relation to the maximum value of the random number circuit 75 (“65535”). In addition, the number of index value IVs is the same when betting 3 cards and when betting 2 cards. It is the same at time and at the time of betting two cards.

Specifically, the index values IV=1 to 6 are set with the first bell winning data and any one of the first to sixth compensation winning data are set. In the case of winning with index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. When the reel 32M is the middle reel 32M and the reel 32R is the third stop (reel where the last stop command is issued), the first bell win is guaranteed regardless of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Otherwise, the first compensation winning prize can be established. When winning with index value IV=2, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each of the stop buttons 42-44. Regardless of the operation timing of (1), the first bell winning is established without fail, and in other cases, the fourth compensation winning can be established. When winning with index value IV=3, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, each of the stop buttons 42-44. Regardless of the operation timing of (1), the first bell winning is established without fail, and in other cases, the third complementary winning can be established. When winning with index value IV=4, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each of the stop buttons 42-44. Regardless of the operation timing of (1), the first bell winning is established without fail, and in other cases, the sixth compensation winning can be established. When winning with index value IV=5, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each of the stop buttons 42-44. Regardless of the operation timing of (1), the first bell winning is established without fail, and in other cases, the second compensation winning can be established. When winning with index value IV=6, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each of the stop buttons 42-44. Regardless of the operation timing of (1), the first bell winning is surely established, and in other cases, the fifth compensation winning can be established.

In the present slot machine 10, as already explained, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the non-CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled so that up to four symbols can be slid. done. In other words, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to be stopped within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it is possible to facilitate establishment of a prize corresponding to a winning combination, and to avoid establishment of a prize corresponding to a non-winning combination. becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, only one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R constitutes a combination of symbols for winning a prize. If there are five or more symbols between constituent symbols, depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML. say). The 1st bell winning, 2nd bell winning and various replay winnings are a winning mode in which no loss occurs when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order. The watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, the cherry prize, the first CB prize, and the second CB prize are prize modes in which failure can occur depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The index values IV=7 to 9 are set with the second bell winning data and any one of the seventh to ninth compensation winning data. When winning with index value IV=7, as shown in FIG. The second bell winning prize is established without fail regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the seventh compensation winning prize can be established. When winning with the index value IV=8, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be the second stop and the third stop and the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 Regardless of the timing, the 2nd bell winning is surely established, and in other cases, the 9th compensation winning can be established. When winning with index value IV=9, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be the second stop and the third stop and the operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 Regardless of the timing, the 2nd bell winning is surely established, and in other cases, the 8th compensation winning can be established.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the index value IV=10 is set with the first bell winning data. When winning with the index value IV=10, as shown in FIG. 16, the winning of the first bell is surely established regardless of the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. .

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, only the first watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=11. If a win is made with the index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 16, the first watermelon win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first watermelon prize will not be established. As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, only the second watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=12. If a win is made with the index value IV=12, as shown in FIG. 16, the second watermelon win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second watermelon prize will not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, only cherry-winning data is set for the index value IV=13. If a win is made with the index value IV=13, as shown in FIG. 16, a cherry win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L, there is a possibility that the cherry winning will not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, only the first chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV=14. When winning with index value IV=14, as shown in FIG. 16, 1st chance replay winning is established without fail regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. do. Also, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, only the second chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV=15. When winning with the index value IV=15, as shown in FIG. 16, the second chance replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. do. Also, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV=16. When winning with the index value IV=16, as shown in FIG. 16, the normal replay winning is assured regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44.

For the index value IV=17, only the 1st CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. Only the second CB winning data is set as shown. In other words, the first CB winning data is set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", and the first CB winning is only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3". can be established. The second CB winning data is set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2", and the second CB winning is only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2". can be established. When the first CB winning data is set, if the number of bets on the game medium is "3", as shown in FIG. 16, the first CB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, there is a possibility that the first CB winning will not be established. When the second CB winning data is set, if the number of game media bets is "2", the second CB winning can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, as shown in FIG. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, there is a possibility that the second CB winning will not be established.

Here, the winning data other than the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are deleted in the winning game regardless of whether or not the corresponding winning has been established, and are deleted in the games following the winning game. is not carried over. On the other hand, the 1st CB winning data and the 2nd CB winning data are cleared by the clearing process of the main side RAM 74 (the 1st CB winning data is partially cleared (step S104) or completely cleared (step S105), and the 2nd CB winning data is stored until the corresponding prize is established, even in the games following the winning game, except when the all clearing process (step S105) is performed. In this case, in a game in which one of the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery.

In other words, as a result of playing the game in a situation where the number of bets is "3", the first CB winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 and the first CB winning data is carried over because the first CB winning has not been established. In this state, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets "3" after that, and the number of bets is increased after that. Even if the game is played under the condition of "2", the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery. In addition, as a result of the game being played in a situation where the number of bets is "2", the second CB winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 and the second CB winning data is carried over because the second CB winning has not been established. In this state, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets "3" after that, and the number of bets is increased after that. Even if the game is played under the condition of "2", the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery. Thus, to prevent either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data from being newly stored although either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is already stored. is possible, and it is possible to prevent a plurality of CB winning data from being accumulated and stored.

14 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=1, the probability of winning when the index value IV=2, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=3 , the probability of winning when the index value IV=4, the probability of winning when the index value IV=5, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=6 are each about 1/ 21.8. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=7, the probability of winning when the index value IV=8, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=9 are approximately 1/21.8. be. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=10 is about 1/9.4. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=11 is about 1/164. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=12 is about 1/146. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=13 is about 1/423. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=14 is about 1/328. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=15 is about 1/164. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=16 is about 1/7.3. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/3.3.

On the other hand, when the combination lottery table for betting 2 in FIG. 15 is selected, the probability of winning for each of the index values IV=1 to 16 is higher than when the combination lottery table for betting 3 is selected. low probability. Specifically, when the combination lottery table is selected when a two-coin bet is selected, the probability of winning for each of the index values IV=1 to 16 is the probability when the combination lottery table is selected when the three-coin bet is selected. is less than 2/3 of the probability. As a result, the game executed with the game medium "3" bet is accompanied by the awarding of the game medium, rather than the game executed with the game medium "2" bet. It is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of a replay prize in which a small winning prize and a replay are awarded.

However, when the combination lottery table for betting two cards is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/2.2. On the other hand, when the combination lottery table for betting 3 cards is selected as described above, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/3.3. As a result, the probability that the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the game executed in the state where "2" game media is betted is executed in the state where "3" game media are betted. It is possible to increase the probability that the first CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the game played.

In addition to the combination lottery table for 3-coin bet and the combination lottery table for 2-coin bet, the main-side ROM 73 also stores the lottery process for the combination in each of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 (FIG. 13). ) is stored therein. Only one index value IV is set in the lottery table for CB, and normal replay winning data is set in the one index value IV. The probability of winning with the index value IV is 3/10, and when winning with the index value IV, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped if the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is a predetermined timing. Regardless of the order, regular replay winnings are established. If the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored. On the other hand, if the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing even though the index value IV is won, or if the index value IV is not won, the first bell win can be established.

Here, the index values IV other than the index values IV=12 and 15 have the same winning probability among the setting values "1" to "6". This applies both when the number of game media bet is "3" and when it is "2". On the other hand, the winning probabilities of index values IV=12 and 15 are different between set values of "1" to "6". Specifically, the probability of winning with the index value IV=12 is lowest when the setting value is "1", the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability of winning is, and the higher the setting value is, the highest when the setting value is "6". expensive. Also, the probability of winning with the index value IV=15 is lowest for the set value of "1", the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning, and the higher the set value is, the highest for the set value of "6". As a result, it is possible to provide a difference in the degree of advantage between the set values "1" to "6".

Returning to the description of the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), after selecting the lottery table in step S402 and setting the index value IV to "1" (step S403), the determination value used when determining whether the winning combination is appropriate or not. DV is set (step S404). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the value of the random number obtained in step S401 is used as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the index value IV=1, which is the current index value IV, is set to this random number value. is added to obtain a new determination value DV.

After that, the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is determined (step S405). Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds "65535" is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds "65535" (step S405: YES), winning data acquisition processing for setting winning data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S406).

If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S405: NO), it means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, after adding 1 to the index value IV (step S407), it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined (step S408). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a judgment target to be judged, the process returns to step S404 to continue judging the winning combination. At this time, in step S404, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S405, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

If the process of step S406 has been executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S408, this means that the determination of whether the winning combination has been completed has been completed. In this case, stop information first setting processing for setting stop information for reel stop control is performed (step S409). After that, in step S410, an advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed, and in step S411, the first control process of the game section is executed. The processing contents of these steps S410 and S411 will be described later.

Thereafter, stop order notification control processing is executed (step S412). In the stop order notification control process, if the current gaming state is a pseudo-bonus state ST4 or an AT state ST5 (see FIG. 19), which will be described later, an index value IV of any of 1 to 6 is selected in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). If one wins, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize on condition that the number of bets in this game is "3". is performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and a command for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize on the image display device 63. It is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 . In addition, if any of the index values IV = 7 to 9 is won in the winning lottery process (Fig. 13), the second Display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the bell winning is performed on the dual-use display unit 66, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32L, 32M, A command for notifying the stop order of 32R by the image display device 63 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 . When the effect-side MPU 92 receives a command corresponding to the notification of the stop order as described above, the display control of the image display device 63 is performed so that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the command is notified. . It should be noted that if the number of bets in the current game is "2", it is assumed that one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 is won in the winning lottery process (Fig. 13) in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or AT state ST5. Also, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not reported on the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66, but the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported in the same manner as when the number of bets is "3". may be configured to be executed.

After that, a game start command transmission process is executed (step S413). In the transmission process, if any winning combination is won in the current lottery process (FIG. 13), information corresponding to the winning combination and information corresponding to the current game state. , and information corresponding to the processing results of steps S410 and S411 are set in a game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 . The game start command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that a new game has started, and is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize various information determined by the main side MPU 72. . When receiving the game start command, the effect-side MPU 92 grasps various information about the current game from the game start command, and determines the contents of the effect in a mode according to the grasped various information. Then, the data table corresponding to the content of the determined performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 are performed according to the read data table. Execute control.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S501). In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R started rotating in the previous game. In that case, wait until the wait time elapses. When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74 . By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing of step S206 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R reaches a constant speed, the main MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting a lamp (not shown) of each stop button 42-44. Players and the like are notified of this.

After that, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S502). If none of the stop buttons 42-44 has been operated, the process of step S502 is repeatedly executed until one of the stop buttons 42-44 is operated. When it is determined that any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, it is determined whether or not the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R have been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. (step S503). If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S502, and the process of step S502 is repeatedly executed until any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S504). The stop instruction command is a command for making the effect-side MPU 92 recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is transmitted, stop control processing shown in steps S505 to S511 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (specifically, the lower stage) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S505). Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. After that, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S506).

In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are slid by one symbol and then stopped, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after being slid by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after being slid by three symbols, and four symbols. There are 5 patterns of stop modes, including a stop mode of stopping after sliding. Therefore, in step S506, any value from "0" to "4" is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the main side RAM74.

After that, the calculated sliding number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position (step S507). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal (step S508), and if they are equal, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R A reel stop process for stopping the rotation of is performed (step S509). After that, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S510). If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed (step S511), and the process returns to step S502.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R correspond to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). , it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") with respect to the arrival symbol that has reached the base position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to stop. As the stop information, sliding number data indicating the correspondence between each symbol and the sliding number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in association with each lottery result and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the sliding number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stopping order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. .

As the processing for setting the stop information, the first stop information setting processing executed in step S409 of the winning lottery processing (FIG. 13) and the step S511 of the reel control processing (FIG. 17) are executed. There is a stop information second setting process. In the first stop information setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process for the combination. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process is changed after the reel is stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, and the stop numbers of the stopped reels 32L, 32M and 32R. .

When it is determined in step S510 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, winning determination processing is executed in step S512. In the winning determination process, the types of symbols stopped on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are grasped. Then, based on the contents of the winning data stored in the main RAM 74, the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes the winning combination in the winning combination lottery process. It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponds to each other, and if the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, it is determined that the winning combination has been won and the winning handling process is executed. In the winning handling process, information on the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that game media can be awarded in the medium awarding process if the winning is a minor win. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed so that the replay setting process is executed in the next start waiting process.

After executing the winning determination process, a winning result command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S513). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not the current winning has been established, and, if the winning has been established, data indicating the type of the winning.

Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 18, the corresponding processing at the end of the game executed in step S310 of the normal processing (FIG. 12) will be described. In addition, since the process of step S310 in the normal process (FIG. 12) is executed after the reel control process (step S308), the corresponding process at the end of the game is to stop the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game. will be executed after

First, a CB process is executed for performing transition control and progress control for the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S601). In the CB processing, if the first CB winning has been established in the current game, the first CB status flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" and the first CB winning data of the main side RAM 74 is cleared. Then, a first CB prize winning command indicating that the state has shifted to the first CB state ST2 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 . As a result, the gaming state becomes the first CB state ST2. In the first CB state ST2, the game is executed only when "3" game media are bet. In the CB processing, if the second CB winning has been established in the current game, the second CB status flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" and the second CB winning data of the main side RAM 74 is cleared. Then, a second CB winning command indicating that the state has shifted to the second CB state ST3 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 . As a result, the gaming state becomes the second CB state ST3. In the second CB state ST3, the game is executed only when "2" game media are betted. In the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, if the first bell win has been established in the current game, the value of the total grant counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by one. The total given counter is a counter for specifying the total number of game media given in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 by the main side MPU 72, and the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is started. Cleared to "0" when When the value of the total grant counter after adding 1 becomes "30" which is the end reference number of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the CB state flag corresponding to the current CB states ST2 and ST3 is set to "0". clear. Then, a CB end command indicating that the current CB states ST2 and ST3 have ended is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92.例文帳に追加

After executing the CB process in step S601 in the corresponding process at the end of the game, on the condition that it is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S602: NO), it corresponds to the current game state. Jump to the processing to be performed (step S603). Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1, normal processing is executed (step S604), and when the gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus processing is executed (step S605). ), when the game state is the AT state ST5, AT processing is executed (step S606), and when the game state is the end preparation state ST6, the second control processing of the game section is executed (step S607). . Further, when any one of the normal process of step S604, the pseudo bonus process of step S605, and the AT process of step S606 is executed, the second control process (step S607) of the game section is executed. In addition, the second control process (step S607) of the game section is executed also when it is in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3. Details of the processing in steps S604 to S607 will be described later.

When the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, by making an affirmative determination in step S602, normal processing in step S604, pseudo-bonus processing in step S605, and AT processing in step S606 Take no action. Therefore, in the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the processing for advancing the normal game state ST1, the processing for advancing the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the processing for advancing the AT state ST5 are executed. not. On the other hand, even if the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the second control process for the game section in step S607 is executed. Therefore, even in the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the process for advancing the second section SC2 is executed.

<About game status and game section>
Next, the game state and game section will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining game states and game intervals existing in the slot machine 10. FIG.

In this slot machine 10, as game states, there are a normal game state ST1, a first CB state ST2, a second CB state ST3, a pseudo-bonus state ST4, an AT state ST5, and an end preparation state ST6. These game states ST1 to ST6 do not overlap each other.

The normal game state ST1 is a game state in which the main side RAM 74 is stayed by executing partial clear processing (step S104) or full clear processing (step S105). Further, when the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 generated in the normal game state ST1 ends, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1 when the end preparation state ST6 ends. In the normal game state ST1, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2".

The normal game state ST1 is the expected net increase in game media in one game ("Expected number of game media to be given in one game" to "Game media bet in one game number of media”) is 0 or less. Further, in the normal game state ST1, there is a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side. There is an internal state stored in RAM 74 .

The first CB state ST2 is a game state to which the game is shifted when the first CB winning is established while the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 . In the first CB state ST2, one game can be executed when the number of bets on game media is "3", while one game can be executed when the number of bets on game media is "2". can't Also, the second CB state ST3 is a game state to which the game is shifted when the second CB winning is established in a situation where the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM74. In the second CB state ST3, one game can be executed when the bet number of game media is "2", while the upper limit bet number is set to "2", so "3" game media are bet. Can not do it.

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states in which the game media owned by the player are not increased. Furthermore, in both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the relevant game state is greater than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the relevant game state. It is a game state in which the number of is reduced.

The pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a game state that is shifted to when conditions for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 are established in the normal game state ST1. The pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends when the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 becomes "0". When the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and the conditions for shifting to the AT state ST5 are not satisfied, the state shifts to the end preparation state ST6.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2". The pseudo bonus state ST4 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and a state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. There is a stored internal state.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when any one of the index values IV=1 to 6 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is notified. Further, in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when any one of the index values IV=7 to 9 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the second bell prize is notified. A game medium of “15” is awarded when the first bell win or the second bell win is established. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be given in one game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if 3 coins are bet, the net increase expected value of game media in one game exceeds "0", and if 2 coins are bet in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the game in one game. The expected value of net increase in media becomes 0 or less.

The AT state ST5 is a game state that is shifted to when conditions for shifting to the AT state ST5 are established in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The AT state ST5 ends when the remaining number of game media to be given becomes "0" or when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. When the AT state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, the state transitions to the end preparation state ST6. Further, when the AT state ST5 is terminated by satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, the normal game state ST1 is entered.

In the AT state ST5, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2". The AT state ST5 is a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. There exists an internal state where

In the AT state ST5, when any one of the index values IV=1 to 6 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is notified. Also, in the AT state ST5, when any one of the index values IV=7 to 9 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the second bell prize is notified. A game medium of “15” is awarded when the first bell prize or the second bell prize is established. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be given in one game in the AT state ST5. In the AT state ST5, if 3 coins are bet, the net increase expected value of game media in one game exceeds "0", and in the AT state ST5, if 2 coins are bet, the amount of game media in 1 game Net increase expected value becomes 0 or less.

The ready-to-end state ST6 is a game state that is shifted to when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the conditions for shifting to the AT state ST5. Also, the ending preparation state ST6 is a game state to which the game is shifted when the AT state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later.

The end preparation state ST6 ends when one game is executed. When the ready-to-end state ST6 ends, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. In the end preparation state ST6, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2". The end preparation state ST6 is a game state in which the net increase expected value of game media in one game is 0 or less regardless of whether 3 or 2 are bet. In addition, the termination preparation state ST6 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and a state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored on the main side. There is an internal state stored in RAM 74 .

In the configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST6 exist as described above, game sections are set separately from these game states ST1 to ST6. A first section SC1 and a second section SC2 are set as game sections. In other words, in the slot machine 10, the number of game media bets of "2" and "3", set values of "1" to "6", various game states ST1 to ST6, and There are game sections of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2.

The first section SC1 includes the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the player to win a prize that is advantageous to the player when a winning combination that is to be established is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. By notifying the stop order of , the expected value of the net increase in game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media to be given in one game") becomes "0 is not started, and the advantageous game state does not continue. When the partial clearing process (step S104) or the complete clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the game state is the normal game state ST1 and the first section SC1. In addition, when the initialization process for the second section SC2 is executed in the second section SC2, the first section SC1 also occurs.

In the first section SC1, a shift to the second section SC2 occurs based on the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), thereby shifting from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2. In this case, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the first section SC1, a transition to the second section SC2 may occur, while the bet number of the first section SC1 is "2". Even if a certain game is executed, there is no opportunity to shift to the second section SC2. Therefore, a player who expects to shift from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 needs to play a game with a bet number of "3" instead of a game with a bet number of "2". There is The second section SC2 is a section in which the advantageous gaming state can be started and in which the advantageous gaming state can be continued. The second section SC2 ends when the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the AT state ST5, or the end preparation state ST6 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1. When the second section SC2 ends, the process proceeds to the first section SC1.

As a condition for ending the second section SC2, the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2 without transitioning to the first section SC1 reaches the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games). The total number of net increases with restrictions on the number of game media reaches the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400) by reaching and continuing the second section SC2 without transitioning to the first section SC1. An ending condition is set that either one of these conditions is satisfied. The restricted total net increase in the number of game media refers to "the total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0 when no game media are awarded"). ")" minus the "total number of game media consumed to execute the game while the second section SC2 is being continued ("0" when the game is not being executed)" In the case of the difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets is set as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets is the increase of the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value. When any one of these ending conditions is satisfied, the AT state ST5 is ended in the game in which the ending condition is satisfied even in the middle of the AT state ST5, the second section SC2 is ended, and the first section SC2 is ended. The state shifts to the state of the normal game state ST1 in the section SC1. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing excessively.

In the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the player can stay in either the first section SC1 or the second section SC2. On the other hand, the pseudo bonus state ST4, the AT state ST5, and the end preparation state ST6 do not stay in the first section SC1, but stay only in the second section SC2.

In the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, a transition lottery process to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 can be executed based on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the winning combination in each game. is executed in games where the number of bets is "3", but is not executed in games where the number of bets is "2". In addition, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, every time one game is executed, the value of the unlocked game number counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is decremented by 1, and after the decrement by 1, the unlocked game number counter is reduced by 1. If the value is "0", the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed. It is not executed in games where the number is "2". Therefore, in the normal game state ST1 in the second interval SC2, a game with a bet number of "3" is better to be executed than a game with a bet number of "2". It is advantageous for the player.

In the normal game state ST1, the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2, even if it is advantageous to execute the game with the number of bets "3", the second section SC2 The number of game media given in a game with a bet number of "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the AT state ST5 in SC2 is the limited total net increase of game media in the second section SC2. In addition, the game in which the bet number is "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2 is executed by continuing the second section SC2. added as the total number of games played. In other words, a game with a bet number of "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2 is disadvantageous to the player. It ends up contributing to the side that satisfies the ending condition of section SC2. From this point of view as well, in the case of any of the normal game state ST1, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2, it is better to execute a game with a bet number of "3". It is more advantageous to the player than having the game with the number "2" run.

Even in the second section SC2, the first CB winning can be established and the second CB winning can be established in the same manner as in the first section SC1. When the first CB win is established in the second section SC2, the second section SC2 enters the first CB state ST2, and the second section SC2 is maintained even after the first CB state ST2 and after the first CB state ST2 ends. be. In addition, when the second CB winning is established in the second section SC2, the second section SC2 becomes the second CB state ST3, and the second section SC2 continues even after the second CB state ST3 and when the second CB state ST3 ends. maintained. In both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, as already explained, the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state is greater than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. This is a game state in which the number of media is reduced. That is, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, the games executed in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 in the second section SC2 are added as the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2. In other words, although the games executed in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are disadvantageous to the player, the games contribute to fulfilling the ending condition of the second section SC2. . Therefore, if the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, it is more disadvantageous for the player.

<Regarding the second section SC2>
Next, the second section SC2 will be explained. First, the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The first control process of the game section is executed in step S411, which is a process executed after completion of the win/loss determination of the win in the win lottery process (FIG. 13).

First, it is determined whether or not the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S701). The second section flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game section is the second section SC2 in the main side MPU 72, and when "1" is set in the second section flag, the second section SC2 , and the first section SC1 is when the value of the second section flag is "0". If the second interval flag is set to "1" (step S701: YES), the processing after step S702 is not executed. As a result, in the case of the second section SC2, the direct hit lottery process in step S706 and the lottery process for the number of unlocked games in step S710 are not executed.

If the second interval flag is not set to "1" (step S701: NO), it is determined whether the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S702). If the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S702: YES), the processing after step S703 is not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S705, the direct hit lottery process in step S706, and the step S710 The lottery process for the number of unlocked games is not executed.

If the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S702: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the bet amount setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3". Then, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S703). If the number of bets for this game is "2" (step S703: NO), the processing after step S704 is not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the first section SC1, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S705, the direct hit lottery process in step S706, and the cancellation game in step S710. The number lottery process will not be executed.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S703: YES), it is determined whether or not any index value IV has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the current combination (step S704). ). If the lottery process (FIG. 13) for this combination is lost (step S704: NO), the processes after step S705 are not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is lost in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the process for setting it to the second section SC2 in step S705 and the direct hit lottery process in step S706 And the lottery process for the number of games to be unlocked in step S710 is not executed.

In the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the current role, if any index value IV is won (step S704: YES), the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the main side RAM 74 The continuous game number counter 74c (see FIG. 9) and the total winning number counter 74d (see FIG. 9) provided in the are each cleared to "0" (step S705). The second section SC2 is set by setting the second section flag to "1".

The number-of-continued-games counter 74c is for specifying the number of times the game is executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without intervening the first section SC1. is a counter of When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) in the second section SC2, the reached game can be played even during the AT state ST5. Then, the second section SC2 ends, and the state shifts to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

The total acquisition number counter 74d informs the main side MPU 72 of the restricted total net increase number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without intervening the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying As already explained, the restricted total net increase in the number of game media refers to the “total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 continues (the total number of game media awarded "0" when the game is not running)" to "the total number of game media consumed for executing the game while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when the game is not running) is the predetermined difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets is set as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets increases by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value. When the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400 cards) in the second section SC2, even in the middle of the AT state ST5, the reached game Then, the second section SC2 ends, and the state shifts to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

After that, a direct hit lottery process is executed (step S706). In the direct hit lottery process, a direct hit lottery table provided in the main side ROM 73 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the main side RAM 74 are used to determine by lottery whether or not to win a direct hit in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. do. In the winning lottery process (Fig. 13) of the role in the current game, if the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 2% probability that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be won directly, and the index value IV = 12 will be won. If the index value IV=13, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be directly hit with a probability of 10%, and the index value IV=13. If 14 is won, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is won directly with a probability of 5%, and if the index value IV=15 is won, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is won directly with a probability of 2%. . In this case, the lower the probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the higher the probability of winning a direct hit in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13).

If the direct hit lottery process results in a direct hit win in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S707: YES), the first transition confirmation flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S708). The first transition confirmation flag is for the main side MPU 72 to specify that transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 was won in the direct hit lottery process (step S706) executed when transitioning to the second section SC2. is a flag. When the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1", a process is executed to shift the game state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 when the current game ends.

After that, lighting processing of the section display section 67 is executed (step S709). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that it is the second section SC2.

If the direct hit lottery process does not result in a direct hit win in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S707: NO), the lottery process for the number of unlocked games is executed (step S710). The number of unlocked games is the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs. In the lottery process for the number of unlocked games, first, the lottery table for the number of unlocked games pre-stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 . Then, the number of unlocked games is selected by collating the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter against the lottery table of the number of unlocked games. In this case, one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games is selected as the number of unlocked games. In addition, the selection probabilities for each number of unlocked games are the same. After executing the lottery process for the number of unlocked games, the number of unlocked games selected in the lottery process for the number of unlocked games is set in the number of unlocked games counter of the main RAM 74 (step S711). The unlocked game number counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining unlocked games in the main MPU 72 .

Thereafter, a lighting lottery process for the section display section 67 is executed (step S712). In the lighting lottery process of the section display unit 67, the lighting lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to set the second section SC2 from the beginning. A lottery determines whether the section display section 67 is to be lit (that is, to be lit immediately) or that the section display section 67 is to be to be lit (that is, standby for lighting) upon transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 thereafter. In the lottery process (Fig. 13) for the role in this game, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 10 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 50%, and standby lighting is selected with a probability of 50%. is selected, and if the index value IV=11 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 65%, and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 35%. is selected with a probability of 62% and the standby mode is selected with a probability of 38%. When lighting standby is selected and index value IV=14 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 75% and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 25% and index value IV=15 is won. , the immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 70%, and the lighting standby is selected with a probability of 30%. Lighting standby is selected with a probability, and when index value IV=17 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 30% and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 70%. In this case, the index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) has a higher probability of selecting immediate lighting.

When immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S712) of the section display section 67 (step S713: YES), the lighting process of the section display section 67 is executed (step S714). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that it is the second section SC2.

On the other hand, when lighting standby is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S712) of the section display unit 67 (step S713: NO), the lighting standby flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" ( step S715). The lighting standby flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that switching of the section display portion 67 from the off state to the lighting state is waiting in the second section SC2.

Next, the second control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second control process for the game section is executed at step S607 in the corresponding process (FIG. 18) at the end of the game. As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game. is executed after all

When "1" is set to the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S801: YES), the state of the flag of the main side RAM 74 is confirmed. It is determined whether or not the game state is the end preparation state ST6 (step S802). When the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without transition to the AT state 5, or when the AT state ST5 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being satisfied, the state transitions to the end preparation state ST6.

If it is in the termination preparation state ST6 (step S802: YES), it is determined whether or not the termination preparation completion flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S803). The termination preparation completion flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 whether or not one game has been executed in the termination preparation state ST6. In the pseudo-bonus processing (step S605) in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 18), it is specified that the number of remaining games to be continued in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 0, and then the state shifts to the normal game state ST1. In this case, a flag is set to enter the termination preparation state ST6, and the termination preparation completion flag is cleared to "0". In addition, in the AT process (step S606) in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 18), it is specified that the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 becomes "0" and shifts to the normal game state ST1. In this case, a flag is set to enter the termination preparation state ST6, and the termination preparation completion flag is cleared to "0".

If the termination preparation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S803: NO), the termination preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S804), and then the processing from step S805 is executed. If the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S803: YES), it means that one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST6. In this case, a process for ending the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the initialization process for the second section SC2 is executed (step S814). In the initialization process of the second section SC2, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the player stays in the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 including the counter for storing the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is maintained. The game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data (including the AT state flag) indicating . Note that even during the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization processing of the second section SC2 is executed and the second section SC2 ends, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 continues without being terminated.

After that, if the section display section 67 is in the lighting state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state (step S815). As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 on the section display section 67 is terminated. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S816). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 executes the effect corresponding to the end of the second section SC2.

If it is not the end preparation state ST6 (step S802: NO), or if the process of step S804 is executed, the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S805). As already explained, the number-of-continued-games counter 74c informs the main MPU 72 of the number of times the game has been executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c after adding one is equal to or greater than 1500, which is the upper limit number of games (step S806). If the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is 1500 or more, it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is met. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S806, and processing for ending the second section SC2 in steps S814 to S816 is executed. The processing contents of steps S814 to S816 have already been explained. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1, and even if the AT state ST5 is in the middle, the AT state ST5 is forcibly ended and the normal game state ST1 is entered.

If the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c is less than 1500 (step S806: NO), is any one of the first-chance replay winning, second-chance replay winning, and normal replay winning achieved in the current game? It is determined whether or not (step S807). In this case, even if the number of bets in the current game is either "2" or "3", the determination in step S807 is made, and the current game is in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB. Any gaming state of the state ST3, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 is subject to the determination in step S807.

If none of the replay wins have been established (step S807: NO), the number of bets for this game (that is, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total winning number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S808). . In this case, even if a replay win was established in the previous game and the current game is a game corresponding to a replay due to the establishment of the replay win, the number of bets for this game (that is, the bet number setting counter 74a value) is subtracted from the total acquisition number counter 74d.

As already explained, the total acquisition number counter 74d counts the total net increase in number of game media with restrictions from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1. This is a counter for identification by the main MPU 72 . As already explained, the restricted total net increase in the number of game media refers to the “total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 continues (the total number of game media awarded "0" when the game is not running)" to "the total number of game media consumed for executing the game while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when the game is not running) is the predetermined difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets is set as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets increases by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value.

After that, in this game, any small role winning prize (1st to 9th supplementary prize, 1st bell prize, 2nd bell prize, 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize and cherry prize) ) is established (step S809). In this case, regardless of whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3", the determination in step S809 is made, and the current game is in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB. Any gaming state of the state ST3, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 is subject to the determination in step S809. When an affirmative determination is made in step S809, the number of game media provided in the current game is added to the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S810).

When a negative determination is made in step S809, or when the process of step S810 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main side RAM 74 is 0 or more (step S811). When the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than 0 (step S811: NO), the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" (step S812).

As described above, in step S808, the number of bets for the current number of games is subtracted from the total winning number counter 74d. Therefore, for example, in the game in the normal game state ST1 immediately after the transition to the second section SC2, any small win is established. Otherwise, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d will be less than zero. In this case, by making a negative determination in step S811, the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" in step S812. As a result, "the total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" in the situation where no game medium is awarded)" to "the second section When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute the game while SC2 is being continued (“0” when the game is not being executed) is set as the predetermined difference number, Using the minimum value of the predetermined difference number as a predetermined reference value, the total net increase number with limitation of game media, which is the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, is measured using the total acquisition number counter 74d. becomes possible.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S807, if an affirmative determination is made in step S811, or if the process of step S812 is executed, does the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceed the upper limit net increase number of "2400"? It is determined whether or not (step S813). If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds "2400", it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S813, and processing for ending the second interval SC2 is executed in steps S814 to S816. The processing contents of steps S814 to S816 have already been explained. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1, and even if the AT state ST5 is in the middle, the AT state ST5 is forcibly ended and the normal game state ST1 is entered.

Here, if any of the replay prizes are established, affirmative determination is made in step S807, and the processing of steps S808 to S812 is not executed. In a game in which a replay winning prize is established, the game media owned by the player at the start of the game is used for setting bets, but as a profit from the replay winning establishment, the same number of bets as in the game in which the replay winning prize was established A new game can be played again with the number of bets. In other words, the number of game media owned by the player does not change in the game in which the replay winning has been established. In this case, by not executing the processing of steps S808 to S812 in a game in which a replay winning has been established, in a game in which the number of game media owned by the player does not change, the value of the total winning number counter 74d is calculated. It is possible to omit the execution of processing for changing , and to omit the execution of useless processing.

On the other hand, even in a game in which a replay win has been established, it is determined in step S813 whether or not the value of the total winning number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number of "2400". As a result, even though the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d had already exceeded the upper limit net increase number of "2400" in the game prior to the game in which the replay winning was established, the second Even if the initialization process of the section SC2 is not executed, it is specified that the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds "2400" which is the upper limit net increase number in the game in which the subsequent replay winning is established. , and the initialization process of the second section SC2 can be executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S813, ending handling processing is executed (step S817). In the ending correspondence process, on condition that the first ending flag provided in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1", the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74 and the AT provided in the main RAM 74 are set. It is determined whether or not the sum of the value of the continuation counter 74e and the value obtained by dividing the expected value of game media acquisition in the AT state ST5 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2. The AT continuation counter 74e is a counter for the main side MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5. The expected acquisition value of game media in one game in the AT state ST5 is about five. The upper limit number of games for the second section SC2 is set to 1500 games as already explained. The upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is not limited to 1500 games, and may be less than 1500 games or more than 1500 games.

When the value of the sum is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2, the first ending flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The first ending flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that there is a high possibility that the number of times the game has been executed in the second section SC2, which is counted using the number-of-continued-games counter 74c, will reach the upper limit number of games. is. When the first ending flag is set to "1", the AT state ST5 is in a state where the remaining number of grants is not added. As a result, in a situation where the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the remaining number of AT states ST5 to be added from occurring.

In the slot machine 10, the value of the sum does not exceed the upper limit number of games of the second section SC2 during the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main side RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter provided in the main side RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e provided in the main side RAM 74 are used for the game in the AT state ST5. The first ending flag may be set to "1" when the sum of the value obtained by dividing by the acquisition expected value of the medium is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2.

When the first ending flag is set to "1", the first ending command is transmitted to the MPU 92 on the production side. When the effect side MPU 92 receives the first ending command in a situation where the effect in the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not yet started, and if the game state at that time is the AT state ST5, the first ending command is received. Triggered by this, the performance mode of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is made to correspond to the ending period. On the other hand, when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the first ending command in a situation where the effect in the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not yet been started and the game state is not the AT state ST5, it shifts to the AT state ST5. In this case, the performance mode of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is made to correspond to the ending period.

In the ending correspondence process, on the condition that the second ending flag provided in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1", the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 and the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 It is determined whether or not the sum with the value of 74e is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2. The upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2 is set to 2400 sheets as already explained. Note that the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2 is not limited to 2400 sheets, and may be less than 2400 sheets or more than 2400 sheets.

When the value of the sum is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2, the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". The second ending flag is for the main MPU 72 to specify that there is a high possibility that the limited total number of net additions of game media measured using the total acquisition number counter 74d will reach the upper limit number of net additions. is a flag. When the second ending flag is set to "1", the AT state ST5 is in a state where the remaining number of grants is not added. As a result, in a situation where the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the remaining number of AT states ST5 to be added from occurring.

In the slot machine 10, the value of the sum does not exceed the upper limit net increase number of the second section SC2 during the pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, the value of the total win counter 74d of the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 multiplied by the expected value of the game media to be acquired in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the The second ending flag may be set to "1" when the sum with the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2.

When the second ending flag is set to "1", the second ending command is transmitted to the MPU 92 on the production side. When the effect side MPU 92 receives the second ending command in a situation where the effect in the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not yet started, and if the game state at that time is the AT state ST5, the second ending command is received. Triggered by this, the performance mode of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is made to correspond to the ending period. On the other hand, when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the second ending command in a situation where the effect in the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not yet started and the game state is not the AT state ST5, it shifts to the AT state ST5. In this case, the performance mode of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is made to correspond to the ending period.

<Regarding normal game state ST1>
Next, the processing contents in the normal game state ST1 will be explained.

In the normal game state ST1, in the advantageous lottery process (step S410) at the start of the game in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". On the condition that the state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3, and that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3", in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for this hand It is determined whether or not any of the index values IV=11 to 15 has been won, and if the lottery has been won, a transfer lottery process is executed. In the transition lottery process, a transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to determine by lottery whether or not to transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) has a higher probability of winning a transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In the transition lottery process, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 transition is won, the second transition confirmation flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1".

In the normal game state ST1, "1" is set to the first transition confirmation flag or the second transition confirmation flag of the main side RAM 74 in the normal processing (step S604) in the corresponding processing (FIG. 18) at the end of the game. If so, a process for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed. As already explained, the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1" when the direct hit lottery process (step S706) in the first control process (FIG. 20) of the game section is won directly, and the second transition confirmation flag is set. is set to "1" when a transition lottery process in the transition lottery process in the advantageous lottery process (step S410) at the start of the game is won as already explained. When "1" is set in the first transition confirmation flag, "50" is set in the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main side RAM 74, so that the game with the number of bets of "3" is executed 50 times. A pseudo-bonus state ST4 that continues until the When the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1", the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 is set to "20", so that the game with the number of bets of "3" is executed 20 times. A pseudo-bonus state ST4 that continues until the Also, a command indicating that the state has shifted to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 . By receiving the command, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4.

In the normal process (step S604), if "1" is not set to both the first transition confirmation flag and the second transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74, the second interval flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". set, the current gaming state is not the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, and the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3". 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-released-games counter. When the value of the unlocked game number counter after subtracting 1 is "0", by setting "20" to the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main side RAM 74, the game with the bet number of "3" is executed 20 times. A pseudo-bonus state ST4 that continues until the Also, a command indicating that the state has shifted to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 . By receiving the command, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4.

In the normal process (step S604), when the process for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed and the lighting standby flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", the section display section 67 is displayed. Switch from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that the current section is the second section SC2.

<Regarding Pseudo-Bonus State ST4>
Next, the details of processing in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing advantageous state processing at the start of the game, which is executed by the main MPU 72 . The advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is a step that is executed after the winning judgment is completed in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) and before the first control process (step S411) of the game section. It is executed in S410. Then, the advantageous state processing at the start of the game is executed when the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game is executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5.

First, it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S901). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S901: NO), the processes after step S902 are not executed. As a result, even if the player is in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5, in the game in which the number of bets is "2", the processes after step S902 are not executed.

When the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S901: YES), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S902). If the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S902: YES), the processing after step S903 is not executed. As a result, even if the pseudo-bonus state flag or the AT state flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", if the state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the processing after step S903 is executed. will not be executed.

If the current gaming state is not the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S902: NO), it is determined whether or not the pseudo bonus state flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S903). If the current gaming state is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S903: NO), it means that the current gaming state is the AT state ST5, so the AT state processing at the start of the game is executed (step S904). . The AT state processing at the start of the game will be described later.

If the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S903: YES), it is determined whether or not the AT transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S905). The AT transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not the condition for transition to the AT state ST5 has already been satisfied in the pseudo bonus state ST4. If the AT shift determination flag is already set to "1" (step S905: YES), it means that the conditions for shifting to the AT state ST5 have already been met in the current pseudo bonus state ST4, so step S906. The process for determining whether or not to shift to the AT state ST5 is not executed thereafter.

If the AT transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S905: NO), one of the index values IV = 11 to 15 has been won in the winning lottery process (Fig. 13) in this game. Under this condition (step S906: YES), the AT shift lottery process is executed (step S907). In the AT shift lottery process, the AT shift lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to shift to the AT state ST5 after the current pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends. A lottery will decide whether or not to allow it. In the lottery process (Fig. 13) of the role in this game, if the index value IV = 11 is won, the AT transition wins with a probability of 20%, and if the index value IV = 12 is won, has a probability of 10% to win the AT transition, and if you win the index value IV = 13, you will win the AT transition with a probability of 40%, and if you win the index value IV = 14, you will have a 30% chance. AT shift wins with a probability, and when the index value IV=15 is won, AT shift wins with a probability of 20%. In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) has a higher probability of winning an AT transition. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13).

If the AT transition is won (step S908: YES), the AT transition determination flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S909). After that, an AT transition winning command indicating that the AT transition has been won is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S910). When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the AT transition winning command, the performance indicating that the AT transition winning has been executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. - 特許庁

Next, the pseudo-bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The pseudo-bonus process is executed at step S605 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 18). As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game, so the pseudo-bonus processing also stops all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from rotating in one game. is executed after

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3" (step S1001). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1001: NO), the processing after step S1002 is not executed. As a result, even if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not subtracted.

In the case of the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the pseudo-bonus processing (FIG. 23) itself is not executed. The number of games played in the state is not treated as the number of games played in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, even if the transition to the CB state occurs in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is restarted from the state of the remaining number of continuous games immediately before the transition to the CB state after the CB state ends. .

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S1001: YES), the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S1002). After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S1003). When the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S1003: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the AT transition confirmation flag of the main side RAM 74 (step S1004).

If the AT shift determination flag is set to "1" (step S1004: YES), it means that the conditions for shifting to the AT state ST5 have been met in the current pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, first, the pseudo-bonus status flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1005). After that, the information corresponding to "200", which is the initial assignment number of the AT state ST5, is set in the AT continuation counter 74e provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1006). Also, the AT state flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1007). Then, an AT shift command indicating that the shift to the AT state ST5 will occur is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1008). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the AT transition command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the performance indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 will occur.

On the other hand, if the AT transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S1004: NO), the process of setting the end preparation state ST6 is executed (step S1009). In the setting process, the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Also, in the setting process, the termination preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the end preparation state ST6 is set, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST6. Also, the termination preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1010). As already described, the end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST6.

As already explained in the end preparation state ST6, if the affirmative determination is made in step S802 in the second control process (FIG. 21) of the game section and the end preparation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S803: NO), after setting the end preparation completion flag to "1", the process for specifying whether or not the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is executed, and the second control process of the game section in the current game ( 21) is terminated. On the other hand, if the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S803: YES), processing for ending the second section SC2 and shifting to the first section SC1 is executed (steps S814 to S816). ). As a result, the second section SC2 ends when the game following the game in which the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended ends.

After executing the process of step S1010, a bonus end command indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1011). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the bonus end command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended.

<Regarding AT state ST5>
Next, the contents of processing in the AT state ST5 will be explained. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing AT state processing executed by the main MPU 72 at the start of the game. As already described, the AT state processing at the start of the game is executed at step S904 in the advantageous state processing at the start of the game (FIG. 22).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1101). As described above, the first ending flag indicates to the main MPU 72 that there is a high possibility that the number of times the game has been executed in the second section SC2, which is counted using the number-of-continued-games counter 74c, will reach the maximum number of games. This is a flag for specifying. As already explained, the second ending flag indicates by the main MPU 72 that there is a high possibility that the limited total number of net additions of game media measured using the total acquisition number counter 74d will reach the upper limit number of net additions. This is a flag for specifying. If "1" is set to either the first ending flag or the second ending flag (step S1101: YES), the processes after step S1102 are not executed. As a result, in a situation where the number of games executed in the second section SC2 is highly likely to reach the upper limit number of games, or in a situation where the total number of net increases with restrictions on game media is highly likely to reach the upper limit number of net increases, After step S1102, the processing for adding the remaining number of grants in AT state ST5 is not executed.

If "1" is not set to both the first ending flag and the second ending flag (step S1101: NO), the index value IV=11 to 15 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in this game. On the condition that one of them is won (step S1102: YES), an additional lottery process is executed (step S1103). In the add-on lottery process, the add-on lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to increase the remaining number of given game media in the AT state ST5. It is determined by lottery whether or not to generate a different addition. In this case, as a mode for increasing the remaining award number in the event of an additional winning, there is a direct hit mode in which the number is increased immediately in the game, and the number of waiting games corresponding to the precursor state from the game (specifically 10 games). Two types are set: one is this precursor state mode in which the number of remaining grants is increased when the game is completed. In addition, in the add-on lottery process, even if the add-on win is not achieved, a false omen win can occur. In the event that a false omen is won, the false omen state is generated until the above number of standby games (specifically, 10 games) from the game concerned are completed.

In both the real omen state and the false omen state, as the effect contents of each game on the image display device 63, an effect with a high degree of expectation that an increase in the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 occurs is easily executed. , the effect content is determined according to a table corresponding to the portent state. In this case, in the main omen state and the false omen state, a more flashy effect is executed on the final game side than on the starting game side. Specifically, in some consecutive games, including the final game of this omen state and false omen state, an effect in which the same character is displayed between multiple games, or an effect in accordance with a series of stories is executed. can be In addition, an effect with a higher degree of expectation is more likely to be executed in this portent state than in the false portent state. In the real sign state, an effect is displayed to make the player aware that the remaining number of grants will increase in the final game of the game with the above waiting game number, and in the false sign state, the final game in the game with the above waiting game number is displayed. An effect is displayed for making the player recognize that the remaining number of grants will not be increased in .

Specifically, for the additional lottery process, if the index value IV = 11 is won, a direct hit winning with a probability of 5% that the number of grants will be 30 is selected, and the number of grants is selected with a probability of 5%. Winning of this omen state with 30 is selected, direct hit winning with 50 grant targets is selected with a probability of 5%, and the number of grant targets is 50 with a probability of 5%. A win is chosen, a win with a false omen state is chosen with a probability of 10%, and a loss with a probability of 70%. If the index value IV = 12 is won, the direct hit winning with a probability of 5% that the number of grant targets is 20 is selected, and the number of grant targets is 20 with a probability of 5%. Winning is selected, direct hit winning with a probability of 5% for granting 40 tokens is selected, winning in this omen state with a probability of 5% for granting target of 40 tokens is selected, and probability of 10%. , the election in the false omen state is selected, and it is lost with a probability of 70%. If the index value IV = 13 is won, the direct hit winning with a probability of 10% that the number of grant targets is 30 is selected, and the number of grant targets is 30 with a probability of 10%. Winning is selected, direct hit winning with a probability of 10% that the number of grant targets is 50 is selected, and winning of this omen state with a probability of 10% that the number of grant targets is 50 is selected, and a probability of 10%. Direct hit winning with 100 tokens to be granted is selected, 10% chance of winning with this omen with 100 tokens to be granted, and 20% chance of winning with false omen status. , with a probability of 20%. If the index value IV = 14 is won, the direct hit winning with a probability of 10% that the number of grant targets is 20 is selected, and the number of grant targets is 20 with a probability of 10%. Winning is selected, direct hit winning with 40 tokens to be granted is selected with a probability of 10%, winning in this omen state with a probability of 10% being 40 tokens to be granted is selected, 10% probability Direct hit winning with 90 tokens to be granted is selected, 10% chance of winning with this omen condition with 90 tokens to be granted, and 20% probability of winning with false omen status. , with a probability of 20%. If the index value IV = 15 is won, the direct hit winning with a probability of 5% that the number of grant targets is 30 is selected, and the number of grant targets is 30 with a probability of 5%. Winning is selected, direct hit winning with a 5% probability of granting 50 tokens is selected, and winning of this omen state with a 5% probability of granting 50 tokens is selected, 10% probability , the election in the false omen state is selected, and it is lost with a probability of 70%.

As described above, in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the lower the probability of winning an index value IV, the higher the probability of winning an additional win. Also, the lower the probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the higher the expected value of the number of awards to be added. In addition, in the lottery process (FIG. 13) of the winning combination, the probability of winning in the false portent state increases as the index value IV has a lower probability of winning. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13).

If direct hit winning is selected in the add-on lottery process (step S1103) (step S1104: YES), the value of the grant number selected as direct hit win in this add-on lottery process (step S1103) is set to AT It is added to the continuation counter 74e (step S1105). After that, a direct hit winning command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1106). The direct hit winning command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the direct hit winning has been made in the additional lottery process (step S1103) and the number of grants in the direct hit winning. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the direct hit winning command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute an effect indicating that the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 has been added. to

If winning of this portent state is selected in the additional lottery processing (step S1103) (step S1107: YES), the value of the number of grants selected as winning of this portent state is added to this additional lottery processing (step S1103). It is added to the planned number counter 74f (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1108). The planned number counter 74f is a counter for the main side MPU 72 to specify the number of grants to be added to the AT continuation counter 74e in the final game of the number of waiting games in this portent state.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the present precursor flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1109). The present portent flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the current state is the present portent state. If this portent flag is not set to "1" (step S1109: NO), it is determined whether or not the false portent flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1110). The false portent flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the current state is the false portent state. If the false portent flag is not set to "1" (step S1110: NO), "10" is set as the value corresponding to the number of standby games for which this portent state will continue. A counter 74g (see FIG. 9) is set (step S1111). The standby counter 74g is a counter for the main side MPU 72 to specify the number of remaining standby games in the case of the real precursor state or the false precursor state.

If any of the index values IV=11 to 15 is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 13) in the situation where the present sign state is already present, the additional lottery process is executed. Then, when a direct hit win is obtained in the additional lottery process, the number of grants selected as the direct hit win is added to the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 even in the middle of this precursory state.

In the event that the additional lottery process executed in the state of the present portent state already results in winning of the present portent state, the given number selected as the winning of the present portent state is stored in the scheduled number counter 74f of the main side RAM 74. Because of the addition, when the current precursor state ends, the value of the expected number counter 74f after the addition is added to the AT continuation counter 74e. In other words, if the winning of the present sign state occurs in the middle of the present sign state, the given number added to the AT continuation counter 74e when the current sign state ends is the newly won sign. Increases by the number of grants selected in the state. However, even if it is newly won in this portent state, if the situation is such that the main portent flag in the main side RAM 74 is already set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S1109, The number of standby games is not set for the standby counter 74g in step S1111. Therefore, even if the win for the present portent state is won in the additional lottery process during the present portent state, the number of waiting games in the present portent state is not extended. This makes it possible to prevent this precursor state from continuing excessively.

In the event that the addition lottery process executed in a situation where the false portent state is already present results in winning of the present portent state, the number of grants selected as the winning of the present portent state is stored in the scheduled number counter 74f of the main side RAM 74. Since it is added, the false portent state is promoted to the real portent state on the way. Then, when this portent state after the promotion ends, the value of the planned number counter 74f is added to the AT continuation counter 74e. However, even if the winning of the present omen state occurs in the middle of the false omen state, if the false omen flag of the main side RAM 74 has already been set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S1110. By doing so, the number of standby games is not set for the standby counter 74g in step S1111. Therefore, even if the player wins the prize for the real omen state in the additional lottery process in the middle of the false omen state, the number of waiting games remaining in the false omen state before the promotion is exhausted in the real omen state after the promotion. exit if This makes it possible to prevent excessive continuation of the false portent state and the actual portent state.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S1109, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1110, or when the process of step S1111 is executed, this portent command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1112). This portent command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the present portent state has been won in the additional lottery process (step S1103) and the number of grants in the winning of this portent state. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives this portent command, the effect corresponding to this portent state is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. - 特許庁After that, "1" is set to the real portent flag in the main RAM 74, and "0" is cleared to the false portent flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1113).

If winning in the false sign state is selected in the additional lottery process (step S1103) (step S1114: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the standby counter 74g of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1115). . When the value of the standby counter 74g is "0" (step S1115: NO), "10" is set in the standby counter 74g as a value corresponding to the number of standby games in which the false precursor state continues (step S1116). ). After that, a false portent command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1117). The false portent command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the false portent state has been won in the additional lottery process (step S1103). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the false portent command, the effect corresponding to the false portent state is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. - 特許庁After that, the false portent flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1118).

On the other hand, if the value of the standby counter 74g is equal to or greater than 1 (step S1115: YES) even if the false portent state is won, the processing for starting the false portent state in steps S1116 to S1118 is executed. do not. Therefore, even if the false portent state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103) in the situation where the real portent state or the false portent state is already present, the false portent state is not newly set, and furthermore, the false portent state is not set. Also, the number of waiting games in the real precursor state or the false precursor state is not increased. This makes it possible to prevent the precursor state from continuing excessively.

FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing AT processing executed by the main MPU 72 . The AT process is executed in step S606 in the corresponding process (FIG. 18) at the end of the game. As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game. executed later.

First, it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S1201). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1201: NO), the processes after step S1202 are not executed. As a result, even if a game in which the bet number is "2" is executed in the AT state ST5, the remaining given number in the AT state ST5 is not subtracted, and furthermore, in the AT state ST5, the real precursor state or the false precursor state If a state has occurred, the number of standby games for that premonitory state is not decremented.

Note that the AT process (FIG. 25) itself is not executed in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3). The number of games played is not treated as the number of games played in AT state ST5. Therefore, even if the state is shifted to the CB state in the middle of the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 is restarted from the state of the remaining number of grants immediately before the shift to the CB state after the end of the CB state.

If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S1201: YES), a small winning combination has been established in the current game, and game media have been awarded in a number exceeding the number of bets of "3". It is determined whether or not (step S1202). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first bell winning, second bell winning, first watermelon winning and second watermelon winning has been established. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, on condition that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1203: YES), subtraction processing of the AT continuation counter 74e is executed (step S1204). . In the subtraction process, the number of bets "3" is subtracted from the number of game media awarded in the current game, and the value after the subtraction is subtracted from the AT continuation counter 74e.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and if game media are awarded in a situation where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more, the awarded number itself is counted by the AT continuation counter 74e without subtracting the number of bets. It may be configured to subtract from the value of 74e. In this case, the AT state ST5 ends when the total number of game media to be paid out becomes equal to or greater than the end reference number. Further, if game media in excess of the number of bets are awarded or a replay prize is not established, the number of game media of the player reduced by the execution of the game may be added to the AT continuation counter 74e. In this case, the AT state ST5 ends when the total net increase in game media reaches the end reference number or more.

When a negative determination is made in step S1202, when a negative determination is made in step S1203, or when the processing of step S1204 is executed, the value of the standby counter 74g of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1205 : YES), the value of the standby counter 74g is subtracted by 1 (step S1206). Then, if the value of the standby counter 74g after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1207: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the main-side RAM 74 flag (step S1208). ).

If the main precursor flag is set to "1" (step S1208: YES), it means that the precursor state to end this time is the main precursor state. In this case, processing for adding the remaining number to be given is executed (step S1209). In the addition process, the value set in the planned number counter 74f of the main side RAM 74 is added to the AT continuation counter 74e. As a result, when the final game in the present precursor state ends, the number of game media to be awarded in the present precursor state is added to the remaining number of game media to be awarded in the AT state ST5.

When a negative determination is made in step S1208 or when the process of step S1209 is executed, the main-side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" for each of the real precursor flag and the false precursor flag (step S1210). As a result, if the current state is the actual portent state, the actual portent state ends, and if the current state is the false portent state, the false portent state ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1205, if a negative determination is made in step S1207, or if the process of step S1210 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0". (step S1211). If the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0" (step S1211: YES), it means that the remaining number of game media to be given in the current AT state ST5 is "0". In this case, by determining whether the value of the standby counter 74g of the main RAM 74 is "0", it is determined whether or not the current state is the true portent state or the false portent state (step S1212).

If the current state is neither the actual portent state nor the false portent state, and the value of the standby counter 74g of the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1212: YES), the process of setting the termination preparation state ST6 is executed (step S1213). ). In the setting process, the AT state flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Also, in the setting process, the termination preparation state flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the end preparation state ST6 is set, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST6. Thereafter, the termination preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1214). As already described, the end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST6.

As already explained in the end preparation state ST6, if the affirmative determination is made in step S802 in the second control process (FIG. 21) of the game section and the end preparation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S803: NO), after setting the end preparation completion flag to "1", the process for specifying whether or not the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is executed, and the second control process of the game section in the current game ( 21) is terminated. On the other hand, if the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S803: YES), processing for ending the second section SC2 and shifting to the first section SC1 is executed (steps S814 to S816). ). As a result, the second section SC2 ends when the game following the game in which the AT state ST5 has ended ends.

After that, an AT end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1215). The AT end command is a command for making the effect side MPU 92 recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended. When the performance side MPU 92 receives the AT end command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display are performed so that the performance corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is started after the performance indicating that the AT state ST5 is completed. Control device 63 .

On the other hand, if the current state is the actual portent state or the false portent state and the value of the standby counter 74g of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1212: NO), the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0" and the current AT Even if the remaining number of game media to be given in the state ST5 is "0", the processing for terminating the AT state ST5 in steps S1213 to S1215 is not executed. As a result, even if the remaining number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5 becomes "0", the AT state ST5 continues without being terminated in the case of the real precursor state or the false precursor state. In the case of the present portent state, the value of the scheduled number counter 74f of the main side RAM 74 is added to the AT continuation counter 74e in the final game of the present portent state. continues. In the case of a false portent state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is not incremented in the final game of the false portent state, but in the middle of the false portent state, if a direct hit is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103). is added to the AT continuation counter 74e, the AT state ST5 can continue even after the false portent state ends.

FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the effect control process for AT executed by the effect side MPU 92. As shown in FIG. The effect control process for AT is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

When the AT shift command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S1301: YES), the AT base table pre-stored in the effect side ROM 93 is read out to the effect side RAM 94 (step S1302). Execution control of the performance is performed according to the base table for AT, so that the upper lamp 61 performs light emission performance corresponding to the base performance of the AT state ST5, and the speaker 62 outputs sound output performance corresponding to the base performance of the AT state ST5. is performed, and the image display device 63 performs a display effect corresponding to the base effect of the AT state ST5.

FIG. 27(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the base effect in the AT state ST5 in the image display device 63. FIG. As shown in FIG. 27(a), in the base effect for the AT state ST5, a moving image display of the base image G11 by the base character image is performed. In addition, a remaining number display image G12 for informing the remaining number of game media to be awarded in the AT state ST5 is displayed, and an acquired number display image G13 for informing the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5 is displayed. Is displayed. Based on commands received from the main MPU 72, the effect-side MPU 92 can grasp the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 and the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5, and according to the grasped information. The display contents of the remaining number display image G12 and the acquired number display image G13 are updated as appropriate.

If a direct hit winning command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1303: YES), the grant number for this direct hit winning is grasped from the information included in the direct hit winning command (step S1304), and the grasped grant number The corresponding direct hit winning table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S1305). Execution control of the performance is performed according to the direct hit winning table, so that the upper lamp 61 performs the light emission performance corresponding to the direct hit winning, and the speaker 62 performs the sound output performance corresponding to the direct hit winning in the AT state ST5, On the image display device 63, a display effect corresponding to direct hit winning is performed. In this case, in the image display device 63, an image for notifying the award number for the direct hit winning this time is displayed superimposed on a part of the base effect of the AT state ST5, and after the display is performed, the award number is displayed. A display that is added to the number of the remaining given number display image G12 is performed. In the remaining award number display image G12, a number resulting from adding the award number in the current direct hit win to the remaining award number up to that point is displayed. As a result, the player can understand that the number of remaining grants has increased due to direct hit winning.

Here, in a game in which a direct hit win is achieved in the main or false omen state, the image display device 63 superimposes part of the production of the main omen state or the false omen state on this time. is displayed, and after the display is performed, a display is performed in which the number of awards is added to the number of the remaining number of awards display image G12. Therefore, even in the middle of the real omen state or the false omen state, the player can grasp that the remaining given number has increased due to the direct winning.

If a false portent command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1306: YES), the false portent table is read from the rendering ROM 93 to the rendering RAM 94 (step S1307). By controlling the execution of the effects according to the false portent table, the upper lamp 61 performs a light emission effect corresponding to the false portent state, the speaker 62 performs a sound output effect corresponding to the false portent state, and an image is displayed. A display effect corresponding to the false portent state is performed in the device 63 .

FIG. 27(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display effect corresponding to the false portent state or the real portent state in the image display device 63. FIG. As shown in FIG. 27(b), in the display effect corresponding to the false portent state or the main portent state, the remaining given number display image G12 and the acquired number display image G13 are displayed in the same manner as the base effect for the AT state ST5. In addition, in the display effect corresponding to the false portent state or the real portent state, a moving image display of the portent effect image G14 by the portent effect character image is performed. In the portent effect image G14, an effect with a high degree of expectation that an increase in the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 occurs is likely to be executed. Also, a more flashy effect is executed on the final game side than on the starting game side of the false omen state or the real omen state. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game, an effect in which the same character is displayed in a plurality of games or an effect in accordance with a series of stories can be executed. In addition, in the final game in the false portent state, an image is displayed that allows the player to recognize that the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 will not increase. In the situation shown in FIG. 27(b), the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is "0" in the middle of the false portent state. 0” is displayed, but the AT state ST5 continues without ending because the false precursor state is in progress.

If the present portent command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1308: YES), the grant number selected by the present portent state winning that triggered the transmission of the present portent command is obtained from the information included in the present portent command. It grasps and adds the grasped planned number to the provision planned number counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1309). After that, it is determined whether or not the current state is in execution of the actual portent state or the false portent state (step S1310).

If the effect of the main omen state or false omen state is not being executed (step S1310: NO), the main omen table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S1311). Execution control of the performance is performed according to the main portent table, so that the upper lamp 61 performs the light emission performance corresponding to the main portent state, the speaker 62 performs the sound output performance corresponding to the main portent state, and the image is displayed. In the device 63, a display effect corresponding to this precursor state is performed. The contents of the display effect of the image display device 63 corresponding to the present precursor state are the same as the contents of the display effect corresponding to the false precursor state, except for the final game, and the display of the remaining given number is shown in FIG. 27(b). An image G12, an acquisition number display image G13, and an omen effect image G14 are displayed as moving images. In the final game in this precursory state, an image for notifying the number of grants corresponding to the value of the expected number counter of the effect-side RAM 94 is displayed. is added to the number of . In the remaining given number display image G12, a number obtained by adding the given number at the end of the current precursor state to the remaining given number until then is displayed. As a result, the player can grasp that the remaining given number has increased due to this precursor state.

If the effect of the real precursor state or the false precursor state is being executed (step S1310: YES), a correction process is executed (step S1312). In the correction process, if the current state is in the middle of the false portent state, the data corresponding to the final game effect in the false portent table read out to the effect side RAM 94 is changed to the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5. It is changed to data that enables the execution of the effect corresponding to the increase in and also enables the notification of the number of grants corresponding to the value of the grant constant counter of the performance side RAM 94. - 特許庁Further, if the current state is in the middle of the present portent state, the data corresponding to the effect of the final game in the present portent table read out to the effect-side RAM 94 is added in step S1309, and then added to the effect-side RAM 94. Change to data that enables notification of the number of grants corresponding to the value of the constant counter.

As already explained, even if the winning state is won in the middle of the false omen state or the main omen state, the value of the standby counter 74g of the main side RAM 74 is not changed, so the number of remaining standby games in the current omen state is changed. After the winning of this portent state, the remaining number of standby games is consumed, and this portent state ends. Therefore, even if the effect-side MPU 92 wins for the actual portent state in the middle of the false portent state or the actual portent state, the final game data in the portent table for executing the effect corresponding to the current portent state is changed. Only by correcting, the process of increasing the number of games in which the effect corresponding to the premonitory state is executed is not performed. As a result, in the game in which the value of the planned number counter 74f of the main RAM 74 is added to the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74 in the main MPU 72, the player is informed of the given number to be added. becomes possible.

When the AT end command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S1313: YES), the AT end table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S1314). Execution control of the effect is performed according to the AT end table, so that the upper lamp 61 performs a light emission effect corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5, and the speaker 62 performs a sound output effect corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5. Then, the image display device 63 performs a display effect corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5.

FIG. 27(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display effect corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5 on the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 27(c), in the display effect corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5, a moving image display of the end image G15 by the end character image is performed. In addition, a character image G16 of "END" is displayed to indicate that the AT state ST5 has ended, and a total number of game media image G17 is displayed to notify the total number of game media acquired in the current AT state ST5. is displayed.

In the effect control process for AT (FIG. 26), in addition to the above processes, other processes are executed (step S1315). In the other processing, data to be referred to in various tables are updated as the game progresses, and processing for updating the effect content is executed. Further, when game media are given, a process of updating the display contents of the remaining given number display image G12 and the obtained number display image G13 is executed accordingly. Also, when the first ending command or the second ending command is received from the main MPU 72, a process for performing an ending effect is executed.

Next, how the presentation corresponding to the portent state progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 28(a) shows the period of the AT state ST5, FIG. 28(b) shows the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74, and FIG. 28(c) shows the value of the standby counter 74g of the main RAM 74. FIG. 28(d) shows the timing of direct hit winning in the additional lottery process (step S1103), FIG. 28(e) shows the period of this precursor state, and FIG. 28(f) shows the false precursor state. indicates a period of time.

First, the case where the AT state ST5 ends when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" during the false portent state and the false portent state ends will be described.

At the timing of t1, the AT state ST5 is started as shown in FIG. 28(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 28(b), the AT continuation counter 74e is set to "200", which is the initial assignment number of the AT state ST5. As the game is repeatedly executed in the AT state ST5 and game media are awarded in excess of the number of bets in the game, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b).

After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 28(d), direct hit winning is achieved in the additional lottery process (step S1103). Therefore, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e increases at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 28(b).

After that, at the timing of t3, the addition lottery process (step S1103) is won, so that the present portent state is started as shown in FIG. "10" corresponding to the number of waiting games is set in the waiting counter 74g. Even in this precursor state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. Further, by executing the game in this precursor state, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c).

After that, at the timing t4, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and this precursor state ends as shown in FIG. 28(e). In this case, the AT continuation counter 74e is added to the given number set in the scheduled number counter 74f of the main side RAM 74 when the present precursor state is started, so that the AT The value of the continuation counter 74e is incremented.

After that, at the timing of t5, the addition lottery process (step S1103) wins the false portent state, thereby starting the false portent state as shown in FIG. "10" corresponding to the number of waiting games is set in the waiting counter 74g. Even in the false portent state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b) by executing the game and awarding game media exceeding the number of bets. Further, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c) by executing the game in the false portent state. After that, at the timing t6, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the false precursor state ends as shown in FIG. 28(f). Since addition of the given number does not occur in the false portent state, the AT continuation counter 74e does not increase as shown in FIG. 28(b).

After that, at the timing of t7, the false portent state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103), so that the false portent state is started as shown in FIG. "10" corresponding to the number of waiting games is set in the waiting counter 74g. Even in the false portent state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b) by executing the game and awarding game media exceeding the number of bets. Further, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c) by executing the game in the false portent state.

After that, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b) at the timing t8 during the false precursor state. However, at the timing t8, the value of the standby counter 74g is 1 or more as shown in FIG. AT state ST5 continues without termination. After that, at the timing of t9, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the false precursor state ends as shown in FIG. 28(f). Since addition of the given number does not occur in the false portent state, the AT continuation counter 74e does not increase as shown in FIG. 28(b). At the timing t9, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is already "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b). Therefore, at the timing of t9, the AT state ST5 ends as shown in FIG. 28(a).

Next, the case where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" in the middle of the false portent state and a direct hit winning occurs in the middle of the false portent state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), at the timing of t10, which is AT state ST5, the false portent state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103), and the false portent state is displayed as shown in FIG. 28(f). When the game is started, "10" corresponding to the number of waiting games is set in the waiting counter 74g as shown in FIG. 28(c). Even in the false portent state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b) by executing the game and awarding game media exceeding the number of bets. Further, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c) by executing the game in the false portent state.

After that, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" at the timing t11 in the middle of the false portent state, as shown in FIG. However, at the timing of t11, the value of the standby counter 74g is 1 or more as shown in FIG. 28(c) and the false precursor state is in progress. AT state ST5 continues without termination.

After that, at the timing of t12 in the middle of the false omen state, as shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28B at the timing of t12, the AT continuation counter 74e has a value of 1 or more by adding the award number selected in direct hit winning to the AT continuation counter 74e. When the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes 1 or more, the game is executed in the false portent state, and game media exceeding the number of bets are awarded, and as shown in FIG. is subtracted.

After that, at the timing of t13, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the false precursor state ends as shown in FIG. 28(f). Since addition of the given number does not occur in the false portent state, the AT continuation counter 74e does not increase as shown in FIG. 28(b). However, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 28(b), the number of grants increased at the timing of t12 is not "0", so the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more. Therefore, the AT state ST5 continues even if the false portent state ends. After that, at the timing of t14, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b), thereby ending the AT state ST5 as shown in FIG. 28(a).

Next, the case where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" in the middle of the false portent state and the winning of this portent state is won in the middle of the false portent state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), at the timing of t15, which is AT state ST5, the false portent state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103), and the false portent state is displayed as shown in FIG. 28(f). When the game is started, "10" corresponding to the number of waiting games is set in the waiting counter 74g as shown in FIG. 28(c). Even in the false portent state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b) by executing the game and awarding game media exceeding the number of bets. Further, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c) by executing the game in the false portent state.

After that, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" at the timing t16 in the middle of the false portent state, as shown in FIG. However, at the timing of t16, the value of the standby counter 74g is 1 or more as shown in FIG. AT state ST5 continues without termination.

After that, at the timing of t17 in the middle of the false portent state, the additional lottery process (step S1103) wins the real portent state, so that the false portent state is shown in FIGS. is promoted to this omen state. However, as shown in FIG. 28(c), the number of waiting games is not reset to the waiting counter 74g, and the remaining number of waiting games is taken over as it is.

At the timing of t18, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and this precursor state ends as shown in FIG. 28(e). In this case, the AT continuation counter 74e is added to the given number set in the scheduled number counter 74f of the main side RAM 74 when the present precursor state is started, so that the AT The value of the continuation counter 74e is incremented. Therefore, the AT state ST5 continues even if this precursor state ends. After that, at the timing of t19, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b), thereby ending the AT state ST5 as shown in FIG. 28(a).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

If the AT state ST5 is in the real precursor state or the false precursor state, even if the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0", that is, even if the remaining number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5 becomes "0", the AT state is maintained. ST5 continues without ending. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the AT state ST5 can continue even if the remaining number of game media to be given becomes "0" in the AT state ST5. In addition, it is possible to prevent the execution of the effect in the main portent state or the false portent state from ending halfway along with the end of the AT state ST5.

In particular, in the case of a false sign state that does not trigger an increase in the remaining number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5, even if the remaining number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5 becomes "0", the AT state ST5 continues without ending. As a result, in a situation where the remaining number of game media to be provided is not "0", the false sign state, which has only a role as an effect that does not change the profit of the player, is set to "0". , the AT state ST5 can be continued, and the player's attention to the false portent state can be increased.

Even if the remaining given number of game media in the AT state ST5 is "0" due to the false portent state, if the AT state ST5 is continued, the remaining given number remains "0" and remains in the false portent state. is completed, the AT state ST5 is also completed. This makes it possible to prevent the AT state ST5 from continuing excessively.

If a direct hit is won in the additional lottery process in the AT state ST5, the remaining number of game media given in the AT state ST5 increases, so the player expects that a direct hit will occur in the AT state ST5. Become. In this case, if the AT state ST5 continues even if the remaining number of grants is "0" due to the false omen state, if the direct hit win is made in this continued situation, the above Increases the number of remaining grants. This makes it possible for the player to expect a direct hit win even in the situation where the AT state ST5 continues due to the false portent state.

Even if the main omen win or the false omen win occur in the main omen state or the false omen state, the number of remaining games in the omen state is maintained without increasing. This makes it possible to prevent the false portent state from continuing excessively.

<Second embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in terms of the manner in which the replay win is established and the contents of the game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination of symbols that result in a normal replay winning prize, a first special replay winning prize, and a second special replay winning prize.

As shown in FIG. 29, in this embodiment, on the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol. In the case of the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol. , on the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol. In this case, on the main line ML, if the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "Red 7" symbol, On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, on the main line ML. , the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "BAR" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, or the left reel on the main line ML When the stopped symbol on the reel 32L is the "BAR" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, the normal replay wins.

In this embodiment, in addition to normal replay winning, first chance replay winning and second chance replay winning, first special replay winning and second special replay winning are set as replay winning. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "Red 7" symbol, 1 special replay prize. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "BAR" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "BAR" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, the second special replay. Win a prize.

In the present slot machine 10, as in the first embodiment, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the non-CB state, each reel 32L is controlled so that up to four symbols can be slid. , 32M and 32R. In other words, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to facilitate establishment of a prize corresponding to a winning combination, and to avoid establishment of a prize corresponding to a non-winning combination. becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, only one reel 32L, 32M, 32R constitutes a combination of symbols for establishing a prize. If there are five or more symbols between constituent symbols, the corresponding constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42-44. The first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize are prize modes that may not be established depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination lottery table for a 3-coin bet in this embodiment, which is selected when the set value is "3" and the number of bets is "3". In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 31 will be referred to as appropriate.

Index values IV=1 to 16 are set with winning data and point values PV which are the same as those in the combination lottery table (FIG. 14) for betting 3 cards in the first embodiment. Also, the same winning data and point value PV as the index value IV=17 in the combination lottery table (FIG. 14) for the 3-coin bet in the first embodiment are set for the index value IV=19.

The normal replay winning data and the first special replay winning data are set to the index value IV=17. When winning with index value IV=17, as shown in FIG. 31, when the first stop is the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M, the second and third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R The normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the type of the game and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R targeted for the second stop and the third stop, either the first special replay prize or the normal replay prize is guaranteed. To establish. In this case, if the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the timing at which the first special replay winning can be established, establishment of the first special replay winning is given priority. If the operation timing is such that it is impossible to establish the first special replay prize, the normal replay prize is established.

The normal replay winning data, the first special replay winning data, and the second special replay winning data are set to the index value IV=18. When winning with index value IV=18, as shown in FIG. 31, when the first stop is the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M, the second and third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R The normal replay prize is surely established irrespective of the type and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. On the other hand, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the first special replay winning prize, the second special replay winning prize, and the normal replay winning prize regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R targeted for the second stop and the third stop. Either of the above is surely established. In this case, if the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the timing at which the first special replay winning can be established, establishment of the first special replay winning is given priority. , If the operation timing is the timing at which the second special replay prize can be established, establishment of the second special replay prize is given priority, and the operation timing establishes the first special replay prize and the second special replay prize. If the timing is such that it is impossible to do so, a normal replay prize is established.

Here, the symbol arrays of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in this embodiment are the same as the symbol arrays of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the first embodiment shown in FIG. In the configuration where it is necessary to stop the right reel 32R as the first stop in order to establish the first special replay winning prize or the second special replay winning prize when the index value IV=18 is won as described above, the configuration shown in FIG. Thus, on the right reel 32R, between the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol, there are more symbols than 4 symbols, which is the number of symbols corresponding to the maximum sliding number. Therefore, when the index value IV=18 is won, the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R with the aim of establishing the first special replay prize. In this case, the "BAR" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the second special replay prize will not be established if the "BAR" symbol does not stop. In addition, the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R with the aim of establishing the second special replay prize when the index value IV=18 is won. In this case, the "red 7" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the first special replay prize will not be established if the "red 7" symbol does not stop. That is, when the right reel 32R is stopped first when the index value IV=18 is won, the reels 32L and 32M are arranged such that the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize are given priority over the normal replay winning prize. , 32R in which the stop control is performed, the priority between the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize is not set in the stop control, and the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44. It is possible to select which one of the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize is established depending on the timing.

As shown in FIG. 30, the point value PV of "600" is set for the index value IV=17, and the point value PV of "200" is set for the index value IV=18. =17, the probability of winning is about 1/109, and the probability of winning with the index value IV=18 is about 1/328. In other words, the index value IV=18, in which both the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize can be established, has only the first special replay winning prize among the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize. The winning probability is set lower than the obtained index value IV=17.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the index value IV=17 is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 13), a notification is made on the main line ML to prompt establishment of the first special replay prize. Also, in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the index value IV=18 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), the establishment of the first special replay prize on the main line ML is established in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. A notification to prompt is made, and in the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a notification to prompt establishment of the second special replay prize is made on the main line ML. These notifications will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b). FIG. 32(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a notification prompting establishment of the first special replay prize is made on the main line ML, and FIG. 32(b) is a second special replay on the main line ML. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a notification prompting establishment of a prize is made; The first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is the state until half of the initial number of continuous games (20 games or 50 games) is completed when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started. The latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is the state after half of the initial continuous games have been completed.

In case of winning index value IV=17 in the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, or winning index value IV=18 in the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, in the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. A display corresponding to the order is performed, and a display indicating that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed at each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is also performed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 32(a2), the dual-use display unit 66 has a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be the second and third stop targets are arbitrary. A corresponding display is made. Then, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the order according to the notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop aiming at the "red 7" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As shown in (a3), a combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols is stopped and displayed on the main line ML.

When the index value IV=17 is won in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, or when the index value IV=18 is won in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, the AT state ST5 is entered. is determined. In this case, in such a situation, the right reel 32R is stopped at the first stop, and a notice to aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is given, and the player follows the notice. By stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in order and operating the stop buttons 42 to 44 aiming at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. As shown in a3), a combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the transition to the AT state ST5 is confirmed by using the result of stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, even if the index value IV=16, to which only the normal replay winning data is set, is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the right reel has a predetermined probability (for example, 20%). While the 32R is first stopped, a notification is given to aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. In this case, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the order according to the notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped aiming at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Even if it is operated, although the "red 7" symbol will stop on the main line ML for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R up to the second stop, it will not be on the main line ML for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for the third stop. "Red 7" symbol does not stop. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player expect a transition to the AT state ST5 by using the notification that the player aims at the "Red 7" symbol as described above.

When the index value IV=17 is won in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, or when the index value IV=18 is won in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, there is a notification to aim for the "red 7" symbol as described above. Even if it occurs, if the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not stopped in the order according to the notification, or if the "red 7" symbol is displayed on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If the stop buttons 42 to 44 are not operated to stop at the timing of stopping, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol will not be stopped and displayed on the main line ML. Usually replay prizes are established. However, even in this case, the game moves to the AT state ST5 after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the benefit of the transition to the AT state ST5 from disappearing due to the player's stop operation mode.

In the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the winning index value IV=18 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), the first stop is the right reel 32R on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 32(b1). A display corresponding to the stop order in which the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped and the reels to be stopped are arbitrary is performed, and the symbols "BAR" should be aimed at the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R. A display indicating that In addition, as shown in FIG. 32(b2), the dual-purpose display unit 66 has a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped for the second stop and the reels for the third stop are arbitrary. A corresponding display is made. Then, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the order according to the notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop aiming at the "BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. As shown in b3), the "BAR" pattern, the "BAR" pattern and the combination of the "BAR" patterns are stopped and displayed on the main line ML.

In the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the index value IV=18 is won, it is confirmed that the player will shift to the AT state ST5 after the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the index value IV=17 in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In the case of winning and in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the game shifts to the AT state ST5, which is more advantageous than the case of winning with the index value IV=18. Specifically, the number of initial grants in AT state ST5 is larger than in the case of shifting to AT state ST5 under other conditions. In this case, in such a situation, the right reel 32R is stopped at the first stop, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are notified to aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, and the order according to the notification is given. 32 (b3) by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and operating the stop buttons 42 to 44 aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As shown in FIG. 2, a "BAR" pattern, a "BAR" pattern and a combination of "BAR" patterns are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the transition to the AT state ST5, which is more advantageous, is confirmed by utilizing the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

In the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, even if the index value IV=16, to which only the normal replay winning data is set, is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), a predetermined probability (for example, 10%) is obtained. , the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, and a notice to aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML is given on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the order according to the notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop until the second stop, the "BAR" symbols stop on the main line ML, but the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the third stop stop "BAR" on the main line ML. ” The pattern does not stop. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player expect a shift to the more advantageous AT state ST5 by utilizing the notification of aiming at the "BAR" symbol as described above.

In the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if the index value IV=18 is won, and even if there is a notification to target the "BAR" symbol as described above, the reels are reeled in the order according to the notification. If the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not stopped, or if the stop buttons 42 to 44 are not operated at the timing when the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, The "BAR" pattern, the "BAR" pattern and the combination of the "BAR" patterns are never stop-displayed on the main line ML, and a normal replay prize is established. However, even in this case, after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, the AT state ST5, which is more advantageous, is entered. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantage of shifting to the AT state ST5, which is more advantageous, from being lost due to the player's stop operation mode.

Here, the first special replay winning data is set to the index value IV=17, and the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set to the index value IV=18. In the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the index value IV=17 or 18 is won, the combinations of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols on the main line ML are stopped. Notification is made. On the other hand, in the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the index value IV=18 is won, a notice is given to stop the combination of the "BAR" symbols, the "BAR" symbols and the "BAR" symbols on the main line ML. will be As a result, in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV=18 for stopping the combination of the "BAR" symbols, the "BAR" symbols and the "BAR" symbols on the main line ML is used to achieve the pseudo-bonus state. In the first half of ST4, it is possible to increase the probability that the combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols will stop on the main line ML.

When the index value IV=17 is won, the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop aiming at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Even in a gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the combinations of the "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. Even if a combination of "Red 7", "Red 7" and "Red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML in a gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the player will not receive any profit other than the replay. Not granted. In this case, in a configuration in which the first special replay winning data is not set to the index value IV=18, the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red" symbol are displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. 7" symbol combination to be stopped and displayed, it is necessary to increase the winning probability of the index value IV=17. In the gaming state which is not the bonus state ST4, the probability that the combinations of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML increases. On the other hand, as described above, not only the second special replay winning data but also the first special replay winning data is set to the index value IV=18, and the index value IV=18 is won in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, the winning probability of the index value IV=17 is provided by notifying to stop the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML. The probability that the combinations of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is prevented from becoming too high. A predetermined probability can be set.

Further, as already explained, on the right reel 32R, between the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol, there are more symbols than 4 symbols, which is the number of symbols corresponding to the maximum sliding number. Therefore, when the index value IV=18 is won, the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R with the aim of establishing the first special replay prize. In this case, the "BAR" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the second special replay prize will not be established if the "BAR" symbol does not stop. In addition, the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R with the aim of establishing the second special replay prize when the index value IV=18 is won. In this case, the "red 7" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the first special replay prize will not be established if the "red 7" symbol does not stop. That is, when the right reel 32R is stopped first when the index value IV=18 is won, the reels 32L and 32M are arranged such that the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize are given priority over the normal replay winning prize. , 32R in which the stop control is performed, the priority between the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize is not set in the stop control, and the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44. It is possible to select which one of the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize is established depending on the timing. As a result, when the index value IV=18 is won, in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML is stopped. In the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV is set to 18 by notifying to stop the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. In the configuration in which the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set, it is possible to stop display a combination of symbols suitable for each situation on the main line ML.

FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing stop order notification control processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 . Note that the stop order notification control process is executed in step S412 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13).

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3" (step S1401). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1401: NO), the processing after step S1402 is not executed. If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S1401: YES), and if the current game state is AT state ST5 (step S1402: YES), an advantageous state notification control process is executed (step S1403). In the notification control process for the advantageous state, the reel 32L that enables the establishment of the first bell prize when any of the index values IV=1 to 6 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize is notified by the image display device 63 while the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32M and 32R is displayed on the combined display unit 66. A command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to make it possible. In addition, in the notification control process for the advantageous state, reels that enable establishment of the second bell prize if any of the index values IV = 7 to 9 are won in the winning lottery process (Fig. 13). Display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the dual-use display unit 66, and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second bell prize is displayed on the image display device 63. A command is sent to the production side MPU 92 so as to be notified at .

If the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1404: YES), if the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination has won the index value IV=17 (step S1405: YES), the right A setting process of the display data for the first stop is executed (step S1406). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be the second and third stop targets are arbitrary is started on the combined display section 66. . The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

After that, a red 7 notification command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1407). FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the notification control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. As shown in FIG. The notification control process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short period (for example, a period of 4 milliseconds) by the effect side MPU 92 . When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the red 7 notification command (step S1501: YES), it reads the red 7 notification table from the effect-side ROM 93 to the effect-side RAM 94 (step S1502). As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be the second and third stop targets are arbitrary, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R The image display device 63 starts to display that the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

Returning to the description of the stop order notification control process (FIG. 33), if the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1404: YES), the index value IV= If 18 is won (step S1408: YES), it is determined whether or not the current situation is the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1409). As already explained, the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is the situation until half of the initial number of continuous games (20 games or 50 games) is completed when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started. The latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is the state after half of the initial continuous games have been completed.

If the situation is the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1409: YES), display data setting processing for the right first stop is executed (step S1410). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be the second and third stop targets are arbitrary is started on the combined display section 66. . The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

After that, a red 7 notification command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1411). When the production side MPU 92 receives the red 7 notification command, as already explained, the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R targeted for the second stop and the third stop are arbitrary. The image display device 63 is caused to start the display corresponding to a certain stop order and the display indicating that the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

If the situation is the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1409: NO), the display data setting process for the right first stop is executed (step S1412). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be the second and third stop targets are arbitrary is started on the combined display section 66. . The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

After that, a BAR notification command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1413). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the BAR notification command in the notification control process (FIG. 34) (step S1503: YES), it reads the BAR notification table from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S1504). As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be the second and third stop targets are arbitrary, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R The image display device 63 starts to display that the player should aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

Returning to the description of the stop order notification control process (FIG. 33), if the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1404: YES), the index value IV= If neither 17 nor 18 is won (step S1408: NO), other processing is executed (step S1414). In other processing, if any of the index values IV=1 to 6 is won in the lottery processing (FIG. 13), the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the establishment of the first bell prize are selected. A display corresponding to the stop order is displayed on the dual-use display unit 66, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is notified by the image display device 63. A command for doing so is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 . In other processes, if the role lottery processing (FIG. 13) is elected to the index value IV = 7 to 9, the reel 32L, 32m, which will be able to establish a second bell prize. A display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32R is displayed on the combined display unit 66, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second bell prize is notified by the image display device 63. A command for making it so is transmitted to the production side MPU 92.例文帳に追加

In the other processes, if the lottery process (FIG. 13) wins the index value IV=16 for which only the normal replay winning data is set, the information lottery process is executed. 7" Notification When winning (the winning probability is, for example, 20%), a red 7 notification command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 . When the production side MPU 92 receives the red 7 notification command, as already explained, the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R targeted for the second stop and the third stop are arbitrary. The image display device 63 is caused to start the display corresponding to a certain stop order and the display indicating that the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated. In this case, the setting processing of the display data for the right first stop is not executed, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop reels 32L and 32M are displayed on the combined display section 66. , 32R are not displayed in any stop order.

In the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if the index value IV=16, to which only the normal replay winning data is set, is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) of the winning combination, the information lottery process is executed. When "BAR" notification winning (the probability of winning is, for example, 10%) is obtained, a BAR notification command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 . When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the BAR notification command, as already explained, the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R targeted for the second stop and the third stop are arbitrary. The image display device 63 is caused to start the display corresponding to the stop order and the display indicating that the player should aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated. In this case, the setting processing of the display data for the right first stop is not executed, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop reels 32L and 32M are displayed on the combined display section 66. , 32R are not displayed in any stop order.

FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the pseudo-bonus processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 . The pseudo-bonus process is executed at step S605 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 18).

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3" (step S1601). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1601: NO), the processes after step S1602 are not executed. As a result, even if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not subtracted.

In the case of the CB state (the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3), the pseudo-bonus processing (FIG. 35) itself is not executed. The number of games played in the state is not treated as the number of games played in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, even if the transition to the CB state occurs in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is resumed from the state of the remaining number of continuous games immediately before the transition to the CB state after the end of the CB state. .

If the number of bets for this game is "3" (step S1601: YES), the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S1602). After that, it is determined whether or not the player wins with the index value IV=17 in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination in the current game (step S1603). If the index value IV=17 is won (step S1603: YES), 1 is added to the value of the transfer advantage counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1604). The transition-time advantage counter is used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not to transition to the AT state ST5 after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, and to specify the advantage of the AT state ST5 when transitioning to the AT state ST5. is a counter. The transition advantage counter is cleared to "0" when transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Also, in step S1604, the value of the transition-time advantage counter is incremented by 1, and the larger the value of the transition-time advantage counter, the greater the number of initial grants of the AT state ST5 after the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Become. Therefore, the more times the index value IV=17 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the more advantageous AT state ST5 will occur thereafter.

After that, a first advantageous occurrence command including information that the transition advantageous counter has been incremented by 1 and the value of the transition advantageous counter after the 1 addition is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1605). When the production-side MPU 92 receives the first advantageous occurrence command in the production control process (FIG. 34), in other processing (step S1513), the table corresponding to the information of the first advantageous occurrence command is retrieved from the production-side ROM 93. It is read out to the effect side RAM 94 . As a result, if the value of the transition-time advantage counter becomes "1" after adding 1, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 produce an effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 is confirmed. If the value of the transition advantage counter becomes 2 or more after the addition of 1, the upper lamp 61 and the speaker provide an effect indicating that the AT state ST5, in which the transition has already been confirmed, has become more advantageous. 62 and image display device 63 .

Returning to the description of the pseudo-bonus processing (FIG. 35), if the winning index value IV=18 is won in the winning combination lottery processing (FIG. 13) in the current game (step S1606: YES), the current situation is the pseudo-bonus state ST4. (step S1607: NO), 1 is added to the transition-time advantage counter in the main RAM 74 (step S1608). If 1 is added in step S1608 in a situation where the value of the advantageous transition counter is "0", the transition to the AT state ST5 is confirmed, and the value of the advantageous transition counter is 1 or more. If 1 is added in step S1608, the AT state ST5, in which the transition has already been confirmed, has become more advantageous.

After that, a first advantageous generation command including information that the transition advantageous counter has been incremented by 1 and the value of the transition advantageous counter after the 1 addition is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1609). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the first advantageous occurrence command in the effect control process (FIG. 34), in other processing (step S1513), the table corresponding to the information of the first advantageous occurrence command is retrieved from the effect-side ROM 93. It is read out to the effect side RAM 94 . As a result, when the value of the transition-time advantage counter becomes "1" after adding 1, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 produce an effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 is confirmed. If the value of the transition advantage counter becomes 2 or more after the addition of 1, the upper lamp 61 and the speaker produce an effect indicating that the AT state ST5, in which the transition has already been confirmed, has become more advantageous. 62 and image display device 63 .

Returning to the description of the pseudo-bonus process (FIG. 35), in the case of the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination in the current game, the index value IV=18 is won (step S1606: YES), and the current situation is a pseudo-bonus. If it is in the second half of the bonus state ST4 (step S1607: YES), 2 is added to the transition advantage counter value of the main RAM 74 (step S1610). If 2 is added in step S1610 when the value of the advantageous transition counter is "0", the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 is confirmed, and the value of the advantageous transition counter is 1 or more. If 2 is added in step S1610 in a certain situation, the AT state ST5, to which the transition has already been confirmed, has become more advantageous.

Thereafter, a second advantageous occurrence command including information that the transition advantageous counter has been incremented by 2 and the value of the transition advantageous counter after 2 is added is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1611). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the second advantageous occurrence command in the effect control process (FIG. 34), in other processing (step S1513), the table corresponding to the information of the second advantageous occurrence command is retrieved from the effect-side ROM 93. It is read out to the effect side RAM 94 . As a result, if the value of the transition-time advantage counter becomes "2" after adding 2, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 provide an effect indicating that the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 is confirmed. , and if the value of the transition advantage counter becomes 3 or more after the addition of 2, the upper lamp 61 displays an effect indicating that the AT state ST5, in which the transition has already been confirmed, has become more advantageous. , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 .

If the process of step S1605 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S1606, if the process of step S1609 is executed, or if the process of step S1611 is executed, the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is "0". ” (step S1612). If the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S1612: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the transfer advantage counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1613).

If the transition-time advantage counter value is 1 or more (step S1613: YES), it means that the conditions for transitioning to the AT state ST5 have been met in the current pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, first, the pseudo-bonus status flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1614). Thereafter, setting processing for the AT continuation counter 74e is executed (step S1615). In the setting process, the initial grant number corresponding to the value of the transfer advantage counter in the main RAM 74 is selected, and the selected initial grant number is set in the AT continuation counter 74 e of the main RAM 74 . Specifically, if the value of the advantageous transition counter is "1", "200" is selected as the initial grant number, and if the value of the advantageous counter during transition is "2", "300" is selected as the initial grant number. If the value of the advantageous counter at the time of transition is "3", then "400" is selected as the initial grant number. Each time you do, the initial grant number is increased by "100". As a result, the greater the value of the transition-time advantage counter, the more advantageous the AT state ST5 is generated.

After that, the AT state flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1616). Then, an AT shift command indicating that the shift to the AT state ST5 occurs is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1617). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the AT transition command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the performance indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 will occur.

On the other hand, if the value of the transition-time advantage counter in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1613: NO), the process of setting the end preparation state ST6 is executed (step S1618). In the setting process, the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Also, in the setting process, the termination preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the end preparation state ST6 is set, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST6. Also, the termination preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1619). Also, a bonus end command indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S1620). When receiving the bonus end command, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing winning determination processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 . Note that the winning determination process is executed in step S512 of the reel control process (FIG. 17).

If the first special replay winning prize (the combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols on the main line ML is stopped) in this game (step S1701: YES), If the current situation is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1702: YES), the first special establishment command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1703). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the first special establishment command in the effect control process (FIG. 34) (step S1505: YES), the first special establishment table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S1506). As a result, the effect indicating that the first special replay winning prize has been established, that is, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML is displayed on the upper lamp. 61 , speaker 62 and image display device 63 .

As already explained, when the index value IV=17 is won in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, regardless of the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the pseudo-bonus processing (Fig. 35 ) in step S1605, based on the transmission of the first advantageous generation command from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92, if the value of the transition time advantage counter becomes "1" after adding 1, the AT state The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 produce an effect indicating that the transition to ST5 has been confirmed. The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the established AT state ST5 has become more advantageous. In addition, when the index value IV=18 is won in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus processing (Fig. 35) based on the transmission of the first advantageous generation command from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 in step S1609 of 35), if the value of the transition time advantage counter becomes "1" after adding 1, AT The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the transition to the state ST5 has been confirmed. The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the AT state ST5 in which is determined has become more advantageous. Further, in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if the index value IV=18 is won, regardless of the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the pseudo-bonus processing (Fig. In step S1611 of 35), based on the transmission of the second advantageous generation command from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92, it is advantageous if the value of the transition time advantage counter becomes "2" after adding 2. The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed, and if the value of the advantage counter at the time of transition becomes 3 or more after adding 2, The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the AT state ST5, to which the transition has already been confirmed, has become more advantageous.

On the other hand, as described above, when the first special replay prize is established in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols on the main line ML is stopped. The upper lamp 61 , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute a red 7 completion effect indicating that the red 7 has been displayed. In this case, the red 7 establishment effect is executed before the effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 is confirmed or the effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more advantageous. After the red 7 establishment effect is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), an effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed or an effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more advantageous. The effect shown is performed over a specific period (for example, 10 seconds).

Also, in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV=17 is won, and the first stop is the right reel 32R. When the notification was executed but the first special replay prize was not established, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol were not stop-displayed on the main line ML. is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), an effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed or an effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more advantageous is performed for a specific period (eg, 10 seconds). Also, in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV=18 is won, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be aimed. If the first special replay winning prize is not established even though the notification indicating that is executed, the combinations of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are stop-displayed on the main line ML. After an effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has not occurred is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), an effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 is confirmed or the AT state ST5 becomes more advantageous. is performed for a specific period (for example, 10 seconds).

Returning to the description of the winning determination process (Fig. 36), if the second special replay winning (the combination of "BAR" symbols, "BAR" symbols, and "BAR" symbols on the main line ML is stopped) in this game, If there is (step S1705: YES), if the current situation is the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1706: YES, step S1708: YES), the second special establishment command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1709). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the second special establishment command in the effect control process (FIG. 34) (step S1507: YES), the second special establishment table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S1508). As a result, the effect indicating that the second special replay prize has been established, that is, the "BAR" pattern, the "BAR" pattern and the combination of the "BAR" patterns are stopped and displayed on the main line ML is the upper lamp 61 and the speaker. 62 and image display device 63 .

As already explained, when the index value IV=18 is won in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus processing is performed after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop rotating regardless of the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Based on the transmission of the second advantageous occurrence command from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 in step S1611 of FIG. Effect indicating that the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 has been confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and the value of the transition-time advantage counter becomes 3 or more after 2 is added. If there is, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the AT state ST5, to which the transition has already been confirmed, has become more advantageous.

On the other hand, when the second special replay prize was established in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as described above, the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the combination of the "BAR" symbols were stopped and displayed on the main line ML. A BAR establishment effect indicating that is executed by the upper lamp 61 , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 . In this case, the BAR establishment effect is executed before the effect indicating that the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 has been confirmed or the effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more advantageous. . After the BAR establishment effect is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), an effect indicating that the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 has been confirmed or that the AT state ST5 has become more advantageous. is performed for a specific period (for example, 10 seconds).

Also, in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV=18 is won, the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R should be aimed. is executed, but if the second special replay prize is not established, it means that the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol was not stop-displayed on the main line ML. After the shown effect is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), an effect indicating that the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 has been confirmed or indicates that the AT state ST5 has become more advantageous. An effect is performed over a specific period (for example, 10 seconds).

Returning to the description of the winning determination process (FIG. 36), when the first special replay winning has been established in the current game (step S1701: YES), and the current situation is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1702: NO). , the first irregular command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1704). In addition, when the second special replay prize has been established in the current game (step S1705: YES) and the current situation is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1706: NO), the first irregular command is sent to the production side MPU 92. (step S1707). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the first irregular command in the effect control process (FIG. 34) (step S1509: YES), the first irregular table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S1510). When the first irregular table is read out, a notification sound is output from the speaker 62 as the first irregular notification sound so that the player can recognize that the replay winning has been established. The content of the notification sound is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the replay winning has been established.

Even if the combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols is stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the gaming state which is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the privilege of replaying is provided. Benefits other than replay benefits are not granted. In this case, when a combination of "red 7" symbols, "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML in a gaming state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4, a first irregular notification is given. By outputting a sound, benefits other than the privilege of replaying are provided even though the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. It is possible to make the player recognize that it will not be done.

When the first irregular table is read out, the first irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, but the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 are not on the main line ML in the gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The notification corresponding to the stopped display of the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol is not executed. As a result, the notice corresponding to the stopped display of the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML in the gaming state which is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is too conspicuous. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Returning to the description of the winning determination process (FIG. 36), if the second special replay winning has been established in the current game (step S1705: YES) and the current situation is the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1706 : YES, step S1708: NO), the second irregular command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1710). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the second irregular command in the effect control process (FIG. 34) (step S1511: YES), it reads out the second irregular table from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S1512). When the second irregular table is read, the combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols on the main line ML stops as the second irregular notification sound from the speaker 62. A notification sound is output that enables the player to recognize that the same profit as that displayed is given. The content of the notification sound is to inform the player that the same profit as when the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML is given. Although it is optional if it can be recognized, for example, a voice saying "It's the same as when Red 7 is established." is output.

Even if the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the combination of the "BAR" symbols are stop-displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the privilege of replaying is given and the main-side RAM 74 is stored. Only 1 is added to the value of the transition advantageous counter, and 2 is not added to the value of the transition advantageous counter. In this case, when the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the combination of the "BAR" symbols are stop-displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the second irregular notification sound is output. By doing so, although the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are displayed on the main line ML. It is possible for the player to recognize that only the same profit as when the combination of the symbol and the "red 7" symbol is stopped is displayed.

When the second irregular table is read out, the second irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, but the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 do not emit any sound on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The notification corresponding to the stopped display of the "BAR" pattern, the "BAR" pattern and the combination of the "BAR" patterns is not executed. As a result, in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the notification corresponding to the stopped display of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the combination of the "BAR" symbols on the main line ML is prevented from becoming too conspicuous. It becomes possible to

In addition, in the winning determination process (FIG. 36), other processes are executed in addition to the various processes described above (step S1711). In other processing, processing other than steps S1701 to S1710 among the processing corresponding to the winning result in the current game is executed.

Next, the operation contents when the first special replay winning prize or the second special replay winning prize is established in each game state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 37(a) shows the execution period of one game, FIG. 37(b) shows the period of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and FIG. 37(c) shows the period of the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. 37(d) shows the timing when the index value IV=17 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), and FIG. 37(e) shows the winning of the index value IV=18 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). FIG. 37(f) shows a notification indicating that the first stop is the right reel 32R and that the symbol "red 7" should be aimed at on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R (hereinafter referred to as "red 7"). 7 notification) is performed on the image display device 63, and FIG. 37(g) shows that the first stop is the right reel 32R, and "BAR 37(h) shows a period during which the image display device 63 is performing notification indicating that the symbol should be aimed at (hereinafter referred to as BAR notification), and FIG. Fig. 37(i) shows the timing when the combination of the "7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed. FIG. 37(j) shows the period during which the first irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, and FIG. 37(k) illustrates the period during which the second irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62. Indicates a period.

First, the case of the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be described.

In the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 37(b) and 37(c), a new game is started at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(d), since the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination wins the index value IV=17, red 7 is announced at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 37(f). be started. Then, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped so as to first stop the right reel 32R according to the Red 7 notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop, aiming at the "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML. As a result, the first special replay prize is established at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 37(h). That is, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the game will shift to the AT state ST5 after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends.

After that, a new game is started at the timing t3 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(e), the lottery process (FIG. 13) wins the index value IV=18. Since the current situation is the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, red 7 notification is started at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 37(f). Then, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped so as to first stop the right reel 32R according to the Red 7 notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop, aiming at the "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML. As a result, the first special replay prize is established at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 37(h). That is, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are stop-displayed on the main line ML. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the AT state ST5, to which the transition has already been confirmed, has become more advantageous.

After that, a new game is started at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(e), the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination wins the index value IV=18. Since the current situation is the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, red 7 notification is started at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 37(f). However, although the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so as to stop the right reel 32R at the first stop, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are pressed aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML without following the Red 7 notification. By performing the stop operation, the second special replay prize is established at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 37(i). That is, the combination of the "BAR" pattern, the "BAR" pattern and the "BAR" pattern is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(k), the sound "It's the same as when Red 7 is established." As a result, although the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, the "RED 7" symbol, the "RED 7" symbol and the "RED 7" symbol are displayed on the main line ML. 7” It is possible to make the player aware that only the same profit as when the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed is awarded.

Next, the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be described.

In the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 37(b) and 37(c), a new game is started at the timing t8 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(e), the lottery process (FIG. 13) wins the index value IV=18. Since the current situation is the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the BAR notification is started at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 37(g). Then, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped so as to first stop the right reel 32R according to the BAR notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. As a result, the second special replay prize is established at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 37(i). That is, the combination of the "BAR" pattern, the "BAR" pattern and the "BAR" pattern is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a more advantageous AT state ST5 will occur.

Next, the case where the state is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 37(b), in a situation other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a new game is started at timing t10 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(d), the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination wins the index value IV=17. However, since the situation is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the red 7 notification is not started as shown in FIG. 37(f). The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so as to first stop the right reel 32R although the red 7 notification is not executed, and the stop button 42 is aimed at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML. . . 44 are stopped, the first special replay prize is established at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 37(h). That is, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. In this case, the sound "Replay!" is output from the speaker 62 as the first irregular notification sound from timing t11 to timing t12 as shown in FIG. 37(j). As a result, although the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, the player recognizes that no benefit other than the benefit of replaying will be given. It is possible to

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37(b), a new game is started as shown in FIG. 37(a) at the timing of t13 in a situation other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(e), the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination wins the index value IV=18. However, since the situation is not in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the red 7 notification is not started as shown in FIG. 37(f), and the BAR notification may be started as shown in FIG. 37(g). do not have. Although the BAR notification is not executed, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped so as to first stop the right reel 32R, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 aim at the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. is operated to stop, the second special replay prize is established at the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 37(i). That is, the combination of the "BAR" pattern, the "BAR" pattern and the "BAR" pattern is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. In this case, the sound "Replay!" is output from the speaker 62 as the first irregular notification sound from timing t14 to timing t15 as shown in FIG. 37(j). As a result, although the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the combination of the "BAR" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, the player can be made aware that no benefit other than the benefit of replaying will be given. It becomes possible.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The first special replay winning data is set to the index value IV=17, and the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set to the index value IV=18. In the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the index value IV=17 or 18 is won, the combinations of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols on the main line ML are stopped. Notification is made. On the other hand, in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the index value IV=18 is won, a notice is given to stop the combination of the "BAR" symbols, the "BAR" symbols and the "BAR" symbols on the main line ML. will be As a result, in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV=18 for stopping the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML is used to achieve the pseudo-bonus state. In the first half of ST4, it is possible to increase the probability that the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol will stop on the main line ML.

When the index value IV=17 is won, the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop aiming at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Even in a gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the combinations of the "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. Even if a combination of ``red 7'', ``red 7'' and ``red 7'' symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML in a gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the player is provided with a profit other than replaying. not. In this case, in the situation where the first special replay winning data is not set to the index value IV=18, the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol are displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. 7" symbol combination to be stopped and displayed, it is necessary to increase the winning probability of the index value IV=17. In the gaming state which is not the bonus state ST4, the probability that the combinations of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML increases. On the other hand, as described above, not only the second special replay winning data but also the first special replay winning data is set to the index value IV=18, and the index value IV=18 is won in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, the winning probability of the index value IV=17 is provided by notifying to stop the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML. The probability that the combinations of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is prevented from becoming too high. A predetermined probability can be set.

On the right reel 32R, between the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol, there are more symbols than 4 symbols, which is the number of symbols corresponding to the maximum sliding number. Therefore, when the index value IV=18 is won, the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R with the aim of establishing the first special replay prize. In this case, the "BAR" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the second special replay prize will not be established if the "BAR" symbol does not stop. In addition, the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R with the aim of establishing the second special replay prize when the index value IV=18 is won. In this case, the "red 7" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the first special replay prize will not be established if the "red 7" symbol does not stop. That is, when the right reel 32R is stopped first when the index value IV=18 is won, the reels 32L and 32M are arranged such that the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize are given priority over the normal replay winning prize. , 32R in which the stop control is performed, the priority between the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize is not set in the stop control, and the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44. It is possible to select which one of the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize is established depending on the timing. As a result, when the index value IV=18 is won, in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML is stopped. In the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV is set to 18 by notifying to stop the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. In the configuration in which the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set, it is possible to stop display a combination of symbols suitable for each situation on the main line ML.

Winning index value IV=17 or 18 in a gaming state that is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" or "BAR" on the main line ML; Even if the "BAR" symbol and the combination of the "BAR" symbols are stopped and displayed, the benefit of replaying is provided, but the benefit other than the benefit of replaying is not provided. In this case, in a gaming state that is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" or "BAR", "BAR" and "BAR" on the main line ML. By outputting the first irregular notification sound when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol and the "Red 7" symbol are displayed on the main line ML. or a combination of 'BAR' patterns, 'BAR' patterns and 'BAR' patterns are stop-displayed, but the player can be made to recognize that no benefit other than the privilege of replaying is given.

In particular, as the first irregular notification sound, a voice saying "It's a replay" indicating that a replay privilege has been given is output. As a result, in a game state that is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV=17 or 18 is won, and a combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols or "BAR" is displayed on the main line ML. " symbol, "BAR" symbol, and combination of "BAR" symbols are stop-displayed, the player can be made to recognize that only the benefit of replaying has been granted.

Although the right reel 32R is first stopped when the index value IV=17 or 18 is won in the gaming state which is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the symbols "RED 7", "RED 7" and "RED 7" are displayed on the main line ML. If the combination of "Red 7" symbol or the combination of "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol and "BAR" symbol are not stop-displayed, the first irregular notification sound is not output. This makes it possible to prevent excessive output of the first irregular notification sound.

When the first irregular table is read out, the first irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, but the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 are not on the main line ML in the gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4. , the combination of "Red 7", "Red 7" and "Red 7" symbols or the combination of "BAR", "BAR" and "BAR" symbols are stopped and displayed. . As a result, in a gaming state that is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" or "BAR", "BAR" and "BAR" on the main line ML. It is possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the stopped display of the symbol combination from being too conspicuous.

When the second special replay prize is established in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the speaker 62 emits a second irregular notification sound, and "Red 7", "Red 7" and "Red 7" are displayed on the main line ML. A notification sound is output that enables the player to recognize that the same profit as when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed is awarded. The content of the notification sound is to inform the player that the same profit as when the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML is given. Although it is optional if it can be recognized, for example, a voice saying "It's the same as when Red 7 is established." is output. Even if the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the combination of the "BAR" symbols are stop-displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the privilege of replaying is given and the main-side RAM 74 is stored. Only 1 is added to the value of the transition advantageous counter, and 2 is not added to the value of the transition advantageous counter. In this case, in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the combination of the "BAR" symbols are stop-displayed on the main line ML, the second irregular notification sound is output. By doing so, although the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, the "RED 7" symbol and the "RED 7" symbol are displayed on the main line ML. It is possible for the player to recognize that only the same profit as when the combination of the symbol and the "red 7" symbol is stop-displayed is awarded.

When the second irregular table is read out, the second irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, but the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 do not emit any sound on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Notification corresponding to the stopped display of the "BAR" pattern, the "BAR" pattern and the combination of the "BAR" patterns is not executed. Thus, in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the notification corresponding to the stopped display of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the combination of the "BAR" symbols on the main line ML is prevented from becoming too conspicuous. It becomes possible to

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the second embodiment in the processing configuration of the winning determination process. The configuration different from that of the second embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the second embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing winning determination processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 .

The processing contents of steps S1808 to S1812 when the second special replay winning has been established (step S1807: YES) and the other processing contents of step S1813 are the same as the winning judgment processing (FIG. 36) in the second embodiment. are the same as steps S1706 to S1711 of . In addition, when the first special replay prize is established in a situation that is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1801: YES, step S1802: NO), the processing content of step S1803 is the same as the prize determination processing in the second embodiment (Fig. 36) is the same as step S1704.

When the first special replay winning prize (combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML is stopped) is established in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1801: YES, Step S1802: YES), the current situation is the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and it is determined whether or not the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination in the current game has won the index value IV=18 (step S1804). . If the current situation is the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, or if the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the winning combination in the current game has won the index value IV=17 (step S1804: NO), the first special establishment command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1805). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the first special establishment command in the effect control process (FIG. 34) (step S1505: YES), the first special establishment table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S1506). As a result, the effect indicating that the first special replay winning prize has been established, that is, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML is displayed on the upper lamp. 61 , speaker 62 and image display device 63 .

If the current situation is the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination in the current game has won the index value IV=18 (step S1804: YES), the first stop is the right reel. 32R, the right reel 32R is first stopped and each reel 32R, 32L, 32M, and 32R, although the BAR notification indicating that the "BAR" symbol should be aimed at on the main line ML is being performed. At 32L, 32M, and 32R, the stop buttons 42-44 were operated to stop aiming at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, and the first special replay prize was established. 7” symbol, “red 7” symbol and combination of “red 7” symbol are stopped and displayed. In this case, the third irregular command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1806).

When the effect side MPU 92 receives the third irregular command, it reads out the third irregular table from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 . When the third irregularity table is read out, the "BAR" pattern, the "BAR" pattern, and the combination of the "BAR" patterns are stopped and displayed on the main line ML as the third irregularity notification sound from the speaker 62. A notification sound is output so that the player can recognize that the same profit as in the case is awarded. The content of the notification sound is such that the player can recognize that the same profit as when the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the combination of the "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. If there is, it is optional, but for example, a voice saying "It's the same as BAR establishment" is output.

According to the above configuration, in the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the right reel 32R is set to the first position even though the index value IV=18 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) and the BAR is notified. When the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped while aiming at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the first special replay prize is established, that is, the main line When the combination of "Red 7", "Red 7" and "Red 7" symbols is stopped and displayed on the ML, the combination of "BAR", "BAR" and "BAR" symbols on the main line ML. A third irregular notification sound is output, which enables the player to recognize that the same profit as when is stopped is displayed. As a result, although the combination of the "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols was stopped on the main line ML, the "BAR", "BAR" and "RED 7" symbols were displayed on the main line ML. It is possible to make the player recognize that the same profit as when the combination of "BAR" symbols is stopped is displayed.

When the third irregular table is read out, the third irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, but the index value IV=18 in the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In spite of winning , the notification corresponding to the stopped display of the combination of the 'red 7' pattern, the 'red 7' pattern and the 'red 7' pattern on the main line ML is not executed. As a result, in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols is stopped and displayed on the main line ML even though the index value IV=18 is won. It is possible to prevent the notification corresponding to what has been done from being too conspicuous.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the game contents of the AT state ST5 are different from those in the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing AT state processing at the start of the game in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72 . As already described, the AT state processing at the start of the game is executed at step S904 in the advantageous state processing at the start of the game (FIG. 22).

On condition that both the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 are not set to "1" (step S1901: NO), the value of the additional period counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. It is determined whether or not the present condition is the add-on period by determining whether or not (step S1902). The add-on period is a period during which the remaining number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5 is more likely to increase than in the situation where the add-on period does not occur in the AT state ST5. The add-on period counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the current situation is the add-on period, and if it is the add-on period, the remaining number of continuous games during the add-on period.

If the value of the add-on period counter is "0" and it is not the add-on period (step S1902: NO), one of the index values IV=11 to 15 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in this game. (step S1903: YES), lottery processing for shifting to the additional period is executed (step S1904). In the lottery process for transitioning to the addition period, a lottery counter periodically updated in the table for addition transition lottery provided in the main ROM 73 and the main RAM 74 is used to determine whether or not to shift to the addition period by lottery. decide.

The add-on period includes a first add-on period and a second add-on period. The expected value for increasing the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is set higher in the second addition period than in the first addition period. Therefore, both the first addition period and the second addition period are more advantageous for the player than the situation where the addition period is not in the AT state ST5, but the second addition period is more advantageous for the player than the first addition period. be advantageous.

Specifically, regarding the lottery process for transition to the additional period, if the index value IV = 11 is won, the transition to the first additional period will be won with a probability of 8%, and the second addition period will be won with a probability of 2%. It will be elected to transition to the period, and it will be out with a probability of 90%. If the index value IV = 12 is won, there is a 4% probability that it will be elected to transition to the first additional period, a 1% probability will be elected to transition to the second additional period, and a 95% probability will be lost. becomes. If the index value IV = 13 is won, there is a 30% probability that it will be elected to transition to the first additional period, a 10% probability will be elected to transition to the second additional period, and a 60% probability will be lost. becomes. If the index value IV = 14 is won, there is a 25% probability that it will be selected to transition to the first additional period, a 5% probability that it will be selected to transition to the second additional period, and a 70% probability that it will be lost. becomes. If the index value IV = 15 is won, there is a probability of 8% that it will be elected to transition to the first additional period, a probability of 2% will be elected to transition to the second additional period, and a probability of 90% will be lost. becomes.

When the transition to the first addition period is won in the lottery process for transition to the addition period (step S1905: YES), the first addition winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1906 ). The first add-on win flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the transition to the first add-on period has been won. Also, a winning command for the first addition period is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1907). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the winning command for the first additional period, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the effect indicating that the transition to the first additional period has been won. do.

If the transition to the second addition period is won in the lottery process for the transition to the addition period (step S1905: NO, step S1908: YES), the second addition winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". set (step S1909). The second add-on win flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the transition to the second add-on period has been won. Also, a winning command for the second addition period is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S1910). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the winning command for the second additional period, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the effect indicating that the transition to the second additional period has been won. do.

In addition, when the lottery process for transition to the additional period results in a loss (step S1905: NO, step S1908: NO), other processes are executed (step S1911). In the other processing, processing corresponding to steps S1103 to S1118 of the AT state processing (FIG. 24) at game start in the first embodiment is executed.

FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing AT processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 . The AT process is executed in step S606 in the corresponding process (FIG. 18) at the end of the game. As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game, the AT processing also stops all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R from rotating in one game. executed later.

When the value of the bet number setting counter of the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S2001: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the additional period counter of the main RAM 74 is "0". It is determined whether it is the first addition period or the second addition period (step S2002). If the value of the add-on period counter is "0" and it is neither the first add-on period nor the second add-on period (step S2002: YES), either the first add-on winning flag or the second add-on winning flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2003).

If either the first add-on win flag or the second add-on win flag is set to "1" (step S2003: YES), the add-on period counter of the main side RAM 74 is set to "10" (step S2004). This results in an add-on period. Also, a start command for the additional period is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2005). In this case, if the first add-on win flag is set to "1", information indicating that it is the first add-on period is included in the add-on period start command, and the second add-on win flag is set to "1". If it is set, information indicating that it is the second add-on period is included in the add-on period start command. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the start command of the additional period including the information of the first additional period, the effect corresponding to the first additional period is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. , when a start command of the additional period including information of the second additional period is received, the performance corresponding to the second additional period is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. - 特許庁

When the value of the additional period counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2002: NO), the value of the additional period counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2006). Then, if the value of the add-on period counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2007: YES), the first add-on winning flag and the second add-on winning flag in the main side RAM 74 are cleared to "0" ( step S2008). In addition, it transmits the end command of the additional period to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2009). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the end command of the additional period, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the effect corresponding to the end of the additional period.

If a negative determination is made in step S2003, if the process of step S2005 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S2007 or if the process of step S2009 is executed, other processes are executed (step S2010). In other processing, processing corresponding to steps S1202 to S1215 of the AT processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment is executed. In this case, if the value of the add-on period counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, that is, if it is the first add-on period or the second add-on period, the subtraction process of the AT continuation counter 74e in step S1204 is not executed. As a result, the remaining number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5 does not decrease during the first extra period or the second extra period.

Returning to the description of the AT state processing at the start of the game (FIG. 39), when the value of the addition period counter of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more, that is, when it is the first addition period or the second addition period (step S1902: YES), the process for the additional period is executed (step S1912). FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing processing for an additional period.

If the second addition winning flag in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S2101: NO), it means that the current addition period is the first addition period. The lottery table for the period is read (step S2102). On the other hand, if the second addition winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2101: YES), it means that the current addition period is the second addition period. The lottery table for the second addition period is read out to the side RAM 74 (step S2103).

When the processing of step S2102 or step S2103 is executed, the additional lottery processing for the additional period is executed (step S2104). In the additional lottery process, lottery numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74, and the acquired lottery numerical information is stored in the lottery table read out to the main RAM 74 in step S2102 or step S2103. match against. In the addition lottery process for the addition period, the number of grants of 10 or more is selected without being lost.

After that, the addition number selected in the addition lottery process for the addition period (step S2104) is added to the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 (step S2105). In addition, a command during the addition period including the information of the added grant number is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2106). When a command is received during the addition period, the MPU 92 on the performance side causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the performance that allows the player to recognize the given number added this time.

FIG. 42 shows the selection mode of the number of grants when the extra lottery process for the extra period (step S2104) is executed with reference to the lottery table for the first extra period, and the lottery table for the second extra period. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of selection of the number of grants when the addition lottery process for the addition period (step S2104) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 42, in each game during the first additional period, 10 tokens are selected with a probability of 25%, 20 tokens are selected with a probability of 25%, and 30 tokens are selected with a probability of 10%. is selected, 40 cards are selected with a probability of 10%, 50 cards are selected with a probability of 10%, 60 cards are selected with a probability of 10%, 5 A given number of 80 is selected with a probability of 5%, and a given number of 100 is selected with a probability of 5%. In this case, the lottery table for the first addition period is set so that a game in which an index value IV with a low winning probability is won in the role lottery process (FIG. 13) is likely to select a larger number of awards. there is In the first addition period, the number of grants that can be selected are all multiples of "2".

As shown in FIG. 42, in each game during the second additional period, 60 tokens are selected with a probability of 20%, 80 tokens are selected with a probability of 20%, and 100 tokens are selected with a probability of 10%. is selected, 120 cards are selected with a probability of 10%, 140 cards are selected with a probability of 10%, 160 cards are selected with a probability of 10%, 10 180 tokens are selected with a probability of 10%, and 200 tokens are selected with a probability of 10%. In this case, the lottery table for the second addition period is set so that a game in which an index value IV with a low winning probability is won in the role lottery process (FIG. 13) is likely to select a larger number of awards. there is In the second addition period, the number of grants that can be selected are all multiples of "4". In addition, the expected value of the number of awards selected in each game and the expected value of the number of awards to be awarded in the entire extra period are higher in the second extra period than in the first extra period.

Next, the contents of the effects executed by the image display device 63 during the first additional period and the second additional period will be described.

FIGS. 43(a) to 43(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution contents of the effects executed by the image display device 63 during the first addition period.

As shown in FIGS. 43(a) to 43(c), the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into left and right halves during the first addition period. The left area A1 and the right area A2 divided into two have substantially the same shape and size. In the left area A1 and the right area A2, moving image displays G21 and G22 for effects and a given number notification display G23 are performed, respectively. and the right area A2 are the same. Specifically, in FIG. 43(a), the moving image display G21 for effect is performed in each of the left area A1 and the right area A2. It is the same as A2. Also, in FIG. 43(b), the moving image display G22 for effect is performed in each of the left area A1 and the right area A2. are identical. Also, in FIG. 43(c), the given number notification display G23 is performed in each of the left side area A1 and the right side area A2. It's becoming

Specifically, regarding the given number notification display G23 shown in FIG. 43(c), an image of "+40" is displayed as the given number notification display G23 in each of the left side area A1 and the right side area A2. This indicates that 80 tokens were awarded in the game during the first extra period. As already explained, the number of grants that can be selected in the first addition period is all multiples of "2". Therefore, regardless of the number of grants selected in the first addition period, the number of grants notification display G23 corresponding to the number of grants obtained by dividing the number of grants by "2" is displayed in the left area A1 and the right area A2. Each can be done.

In the configuration in which the same moving image displays G21 and G22 for effect and the given number notification display G23 are performed respectively in the left area A1 and the right area A2 in which the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into two in the first addition period, these Various information displays G31 to G35, which are not images with the same content, are displayed in the left side area A1 and the right side area A2. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 43(a) to 43(c), a remaining continuous game number image G31 for reporting the remaining number of continuous games during the first addition period is displayed only in the left area A1. . In addition, the acquired number display image G32 for reporting the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5 and the remaining awarded number display image G33 for reporting the remaining number of given game media in the AT state ST5 are displayed only in the right area A2. Is displayed.

In AT state ST5, reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing a first bell prize or a second bell prize when any one of the index values IV=1 to 9 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). However, as shown in FIG. 43(a), the stop order notification image G34 for notifying the stop order is the left area A1 regardless of the division of the left area A1 and the right area A2. and across the boundary of the right area A2. Also, the operation device 121 for presentation (see FIG. 45) may be operated to change, add, or advance the content of moving image display on the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 43(b). Thus, the operation notification image G35 for prompting the operation of the effect operation device 121 is displayed straddling the boundary between the left area A1 and the right area A2 regardless of the division of the left area A1 and the right area A2. The effect operating device 121 is provided on the front face of the slot machine 10 . As shown in FIG. 43(b), the situation in which the operation notification image G35 is displayed is the operation effective period during which the operation of the production operation device 121 is valid, and the production operation device 121 is operated during the operation effective period. 43(c), the given number notification display G23 is performed in the left side area A1 and the right side area A2.

FIGS. 44(a) to 44(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution contents of the effects executed by the image display device 63 during the second addition period.

In the second addition period, as shown in FIGS. 44(a) to 44(c), the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided vertically and horizontally into four. The upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14 that are divided into four have substantially the same shape and size. In the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, moving image displays G41 and G42 for effects and a given number notification display G43 are performed, respectively. The contents of G42 and the given number notification display G43 are the same in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. Specifically, in FIG. 44A, the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14 each display a moving image G41 for effect. The contents of the moving image display G41 are the same in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. Also, in FIG. 44(b), the moving image display G42 for effect is performed in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. The contents of G42 are the same for the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. In addition, in FIG. 44(c), the given number notification display G43 is performed in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. The contents of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14 are the same.

In detail, the given number notification display G43 shown in FIG. 44(c) is "+50 sheets" as the given number notification display G43 in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. image is displayed. This indicates that 200 tokens were awarded in the game during the second extra period. As already explained, the number of grants that can be selected in the second addition period is all multiples of "4". Therefore, regardless of the number of grants selected in the second addition period, the number of grants notification display G43 corresponding to the quotient obtained by dividing the number of grants by "4" is displayed in the upper left region A11 and the upper right region. A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, respectively.

In the second addition period, the same animation display G41, G42 for effect is performed in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14 obtained by dividing the display surface of the image display device 63 into four. , and in the configuration where the given number notification display G43 is performed, various information display G31 that is not an image displayed with the same content in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14 ~G35 is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 44(a) to 44(c), a remaining continuous game number image G31 for reporting the remaining number of continuous games during the second addition period is displayed only in the upper left region A11. be. Also, the acquired number display image G32 for reporting the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5 and the remaining awarded number display image G33 for reporting the remaining number of given game media in the AT state ST5 are displayed only in the upper right area A12. to be displayed.

In AT state ST5, reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing a first bell prize or a second bell prize when any one of the index values IV=1 to 9 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). As shown in FIG. 44(a), the stop order notification image G34 for notifying the stop order includes the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the It is displayed across the boundary between the lower left area A13 and the lower right area A14 regardless of the division of the lower right area A14. Also, the operating device 121 for presentation (see FIG. 45) may be operated in order to change, add, or advance the content of moving image display on the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 44(b). Thus, the operation notification image G35 for prompting the operation of the production operation device 121 is divided into the upper left area A11, the upper right area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. It is displayed straddling the boundaries of the side area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. The effect operating device 121 is provided on the front face of the slot machine 10 . As shown in FIG. 44(b), the situation in which the operation notification image G35 is displayed is the operation effective period during which the operation of the production operation device 121 is valid, and the production operation device 121 is operated during the operation effective period. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44(c), a given number notification display G43 is performed in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14.

An electrical configuration for enabling image display in the first additional period and the second additional period as described above will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

45, a memory module 101, a VRAM 102, and a video display processor (VDP) 103 are mounted on the performance control board 91 of the performance control device 90 in addition to the performance side MPU 92. FIG.

The production side MPU 92 has a function as a main control section in the production control device 90, and reads, interprets and executes control programs and the like. Specifically, the effect side MPU 92 is connected via a bus to an input port 104 mounted on the effect control board 91, and various commands transmitted from the main side MPU 72 are input to the effect side MPU 92 through the input port 104. be done. Receiving a command from the main MPU 72 in the production side MPU 92 is not limited to the configuration of directly receiving the command from the main side MPU 72, but includes the configuration of receiving the command relayed to the relay board.

The effect-side MPU 92 is connected to the VDP 103 via a bus, and instructs the image display device 63 to output an image signal based on the command received from the main-side MPU 72 . The VDP 103 reads the image data stored in the memory module 101 to the VRAM 102 based on the drawing instruction from the production side MPU 92, and uses the read image data to specifically process the image display device 63. It is a kind of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 63b incorporated in the image display device 63 so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display section 63a. Since the VDP 103 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing.

The memory module 101 stores in advance various image data including sprite data such as patterns and characters to be displayed on the image display device 63, background data, moving image data, and the like. The memory module 101 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require power supply from the outside to retain data. Also, the memory module 101 is used as a read-only memory (ROM) when the slot machine 10 is used.

Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outline and pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color of each pixel of the bitmap image. there is Background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in which still image data is compressed. The moving image data is stored and held as MPEG format data in which a plurality of still image data are compressed.

The VRAM 102 is storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for image output to the image display device 63 . The VRAM 102 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing data, and more specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. Although the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the effect control device 90 is executed satisfactorily. The VRAM 102 is used for both reading and writing when using the slot machine 10 .

The VRAM 102 has a development buffer 105 . Image data is transferred from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 103 to the memory module 101 . The VRAM 102 is also provided with a frame buffer 106 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 103 . Note that the VRAM 102 may be incorporated in the VDP 103 .

The VDP 103 will be explained in detail. The VDP 103 includes a control section 111 , a register 112 , a video decoder 113 and a display circuit 114 . These circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to the I/F 115 for the MPU 92 on the production side and the I/F 116 for the VRAM 102 .

The VDP 103 causes the register 112 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the production side MPU 92 . By storing the drawing list in the register 112, the control unit 111 starts a program according to the drawing list and executes predetermined processing. It should be noted that all of the control programs for the operation of the control unit 111 may be provided by the drawing list. may be configured such that the control unit 111 executes a predetermined process. Alternatively, the control program may be read in advance from the memory module 101 .

As the above process, the control unit 111 reads the image data stored in the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 . Also, the control unit 111 creates drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 106 using (or by processing) the image data read out to the expansion buffer 105 . Drawing data for one frame means data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which an image on the display surface of the image display device 63 is updated at a predetermined update timing. .

The frame buffer 106 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 106a and 106b. Specifically, a first frame region 106a and a second frame region 106b are provided. Each of these frame areas 106a and 106b is set to have a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 106a and 106b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display section 63a (that is, the display surface) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full-color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each color of RGB in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

Since the frame buffer 106 is provided with the first frame area 106a and the second frame area 106b, the drawing data created in one of the frame areas is used to perform drawing on the image display device 63. , drawing data to be used in the future for other frame regions is created. In other words, the frame buffer 106 employs a double buffer system.

In the display circuit 114, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display section 63a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 106a or the second frame area 106b. It is output to the image display device 63 via the connected output port 107 . Specifically, drawing data is transferred to the display circuit 114 from the frame regions 106a and 106b to be output. The transferred drawing data is adjusted in resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the image display device 63 and converted into gradation data. An image signal corresponding to each dot of the image display device 63 is generated and output based on the gradation data. The video decoder 113 also decodes the video data transferred to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 .

Next, a processing configuration for enabling image display in the first additional period and the second additional period will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 92 on the effect side. The timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) by the effect side MPU 92 .

First, effect setting processing for setting data used for executing light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63 is executed (step S2201). Thereafter, display control processing (step S2202) for outputting a drawing list to the VDP 103 based on the data set in the effect setting processing, and light emission control of the upper lamp 61 based on the data set in the effect setting processing. light emission control processing (step S2203) and sound output control processing (step S2204) for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 based on the data set in the effect setting processing. Also, pointer update processing is executed (step S2205). In the pointer update process, the pointer information of the table read out to the effect side RAM 94 in the effect setting process is updated to the pointer information of the next order.

FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the effect setting process for the add-on period for performing the process related to the add-on period in the effect setting process of step S2201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 46).

When the winning command for the first addition period is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2301: YES), the first winning correspondence table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2302). Execution control of the performance is performed according to the first winning correspondence table, so that the upper lamp 61 performs light emitting performance corresponding to winning during the first additional period, and the speaker 62 announces winning during the first additional period. A corresponding sound output effect is performed, and a display effect corresponding to winning during the first extra period is performed on the image display device 63 . After that, "1" is set to the first addition effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2303). The first add-on effect flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the win has been made during the first add-on period.

If the winning command for the second addition period has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2304: YES), the second winning correspondence table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2305). Execution control of the performance is performed according to the second winning correspondence table, so that the upper lamp 61 performs light emitting performance corresponding to winning during the second extra period, and the speaker 62 announces winning during the second extra period. A corresponding sound output effect is performed, and a display effect corresponding to winning during the second extra period is performed on the image display device 63 . After that, the second addition effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2306). The second addition effect flag is a flag for specifying that the effect side MPU 92 wins during the second addition period.

When the start command of the additional period is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2307: YES), the period start table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2308). In this case, when the first additional period is newly started, the period start table corresponding to the first additional period is read, and when the second additional period is newly started, the period corresponding to the second additional period is read. Read start table. By performing execution control of the effect according to the period start table, the upper lamp 61 performs the light emission effect corresponding to the first additional period or the second additional period, and the speaker 62 performs the first additional period or the second additional period. A corresponding sound output effect is performed, and a display effect corresponding to the first additional period or the second additional period is performed on the image display device 63 . After that, the addition period flag provided in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2309). The add-on period flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the effect corresponding to the first add-on period or the second add-on period is being executed.

When the command during the addition period is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2310: YES), the number of grants selected this time is grasped from the information included in the command during the addition period (step S2311). After that, when "1" is set to the first addition effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2312: YES), readout processing of the first addition effect table is executed (step S2313). A plurality of types of first addition effect tables are stored in advance in the effect side ROM 93 for each of the number of grants (see FIG. 42) that can be selected in the first addition period. In the reading process of the first addition effect table, the first addition effect table to be used this time is determined by lottery from among the first addition effect table group corresponding to the given number grasped in step S2311. Then, the determined type of first addition effect table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 . By controlling the execution of the effects according to the first additional effect table, the upper lamp 61 performs light emission effects for one game during the first additional effect period, and the speaker 62 outputs sound for one game during the first additional effect period. An effect is performed, and a display effect for one game is performed on the image display device 63 in the first additional period. In this case, when the image display device 63 performs the display effect for one game in the first additional period, the image display as shown in FIGS. 43(a) to 43(c) is performed.

On the other hand, if "1" is not set to the first addition effect flag of the effect side RAM 94, that is, if "1" is set to the second addition effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2312: NO) , read processing of the second addition effect table is executed (step S2314). The effect-side ROM 93 stores in advance a plurality of types of second addition effect tables for each of the number of grants (see FIG. 42) that can be selected in the second addition period. In the reading process of the second addition effect table, the second addition effect table to be used this time is determined by lottery from the second addition effect table group corresponding to the given number grasped in step S2311. Then, the second addition effect table of the determined type is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 . Effect execution control is performed in accordance with the second additional effect table, so that the upper lamp 61 performs light emission effect for one game during the second additional effect period, and the speaker 62 outputs sound for one game during the second additional effect period. An effect is performed, and a display effect for one game is performed on the image display device 63 in the second additional period. In this case, when the image display device 63 performs the display effect for one game in the second additional period, the image display as shown in FIGS. 44(a) to 44(c) is performed.

In the situation where the addition period flag of the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2315: YES), if it is the operation effective period of the production operation device 121 (step S2316: YES), the production operation It is determined whether or not the device 121 has been operated (step S2317). The operation effective period of the effect operating device 121 is set as a period in the middle of one game in the first additional period or the second additional period. An operation notification image G35 as shown in FIG. 43(b) or FIG. 44(b) is displayed on the image display device 63 during the operation valid period.

When the operation device 121 for production|presentation is operated (step S2317: YES), an operation corresponding process is performed (step S2318). In the operation gymnastics process, the part to be referred to in the first additional effect table or the second additional effect table read out to the effect side RAM 94 is changed to the corresponding part after the operation of the operation device 121 for effect. As a result, the image display device 63 performs the given number notification display G23 or G43 as shown in FIG. 43(c) or FIG. 44(c).

If the addition period end command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2319: YES), the period end table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2320). By controlling the execution of the effect according to the period end table, the upper lamp 61 performs light emission effect corresponding to the end of the first additional period or the second additional period, and the speaker 62 performs the first additional period or the second additional period. A sound output effect corresponding to the end of the second addition period is performed, and a display effect corresponding to the end of the first addition period or the second addition period is performed on the image display device 63. - 特許庁Thereafter, flag clear processing is executed (step S2321). In the flag clearing process, the addition period flag, the first addition effect flag and the second addition effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 are cleared to "0".

FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing display control processing for the additional period for performing processing related to the additional period among the display control processing in step S2202 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 46).

When "1" is set to the first addition effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2401: YES), the 2-split specification information is stored in the register of the effect side MPU 92 (step S2402), and read to the effect side RAM 94. From the data to be referred to in the current processing cycle in the table to be referred to among the period start table and the first additional effect table, animation display G21 for effect is displayed in the left area A1 and right area A2 of the image display device 63. , G22 or the number-of-additions notification display G23 is grasped (step S2403), and parameters to be applied to the image data on the division side are grasped (step S2404). The parameters include information such as coordinates, magnification, and α value applied to the image data on the division side.

When the game is not currently being executed, the period start table is the table to be referred to, and when the game is currently being executed, the first addition effect table is the table to be referred to. In the period start table and the first additional effect table, the division-side image data corresponding to the left side area A1 and the right side area A2 are not individually set, but the division side image data corresponding to the left side area A1 is set. Only data is set, and in step S2403, the image data on the divided side is grasped. Information about the image data on the divided side thus grasped is set in a drawing list and transmitted to the VDP 103 . Based on the rendering list, the VDP 103 reads out the image data on the divided side from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102, and uses the read image data on the divided side to display a moving image display G21 for effect in the left area A1. Drawing data for performing G22 or G23 for notifying the number of additions is created, and the drawing data is copied as drawing data for the right side area A2. As a result, it is not necessary to separately set the information of the image data on the division side corresponding to the left side area A1 and the right side area A2 in the period start table and the first additional effect table. It is possible to suppress the data capacity of the table. In addition, since the VDP 103 does not need to create drawing data separately for each of the left side area A1 and the right side area A2, it is possible to reduce the processing load of drawing processing.

As described above, in the first addition effect table, the information of the image data on the division side necessary for performing the award number notification display G23 is set only for the left side area A1. On the other hand, in the effect setting process for the addition period (FIG. 47), when the command is received during the addition period, the number of grants selected in the addition lottery process for the current addition period (step S2104) is grasped. The given number is the sum of the given number notified by the given number notification display G23 in the left area A1 and the given number notified by the given number notification display G23 in the right area A2. Therefore, the information of the division-side image data necessary for performing the award number notification display G23 set in the first addition effect table is the award number set in the command during the addition period, that is, in step S2311. It is image data information indicating a quotient value obtained by dividing the grasped number of grants by "2".

When "1" is not set to the first addition effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2401: NO), the 4-division designation information is stored in the register of the effect side MPU 92 (step S2405), and read to the effect side RAM 94. From the data to be referred to in this processing cycle in the table to be referred to among the period start table and the second addition effect table, the upper left area A11, upper right area A12, and lower left area A13 of the image display device 63 And grasp the image data on the division side necessary to perform the animation display G41, G42 for effect or the number notification display G43 for effect in the lower right area A14 (step S2406), and apply it to the image data on the division side The parameters to be used are grasped (step S2407). The parameters include information such as coordinates, magnification, and α value applied to the image data on the divided side.

When the game is not currently being executed, the period start table is the table to be referred to, and when the game is currently being executed, the second addition performance table is the table to be referred to. In addition, in the period start table and the second additional effect table, image data on the division side corresponding to the upper left area A11, upper right area A12, lower left area A13 and lower right area A14 are individually set. Instead, only the image data on the division side corresponding to the upper left area A11 is set, and in step S2406, the image data on the division side is grasped. Information about the image data on the divided side thus grasped is set in a drawing list and transmitted to the VDP 103 . Based on the drawing list, the VDP 103 reads out the divided image data from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102, and utilizes the read divided image data to display a moving image G41 for effect in the upper left area A11. , G42 or G43, and copy the drawing data to the upper right area A12 side, the lower left area A13 side, and the lower right area A14 side. . Accordingly, it is necessary to individually set the information of the division side image data corresponding to the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14 in the period start table and the second additional effect table. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the data capacity of the period start table and the second addition effect table. In addition, since the VDP 103 does not need to create drawing data individually for each of the upper left area A11, upper right area A12, lower left area A13, and lower right area A14, the processing load of the drawing process can be reduced. becomes possible.

As described above, in the second addition effect table, the information of the image data on the division side necessary for performing the award number notification display G43 is set only for the upper left area A11. On the other hand, in the effect setting process for the addition period (FIG. 47), when the command is received during the addition period, the number of grants selected in the addition lottery process for the current addition period (step S2104) is grasped. The number of grants is the number of grants notified by the number of grants notification display G43 in the upper left area A11, the number of grants notified by the number of grants notification display G43 in the upper right area A12, and the number of grants in the lower left area A13. It is the total amount of the number of grants notified by the notification display G43 and the number of grants notified by the number of grant notification display G43 in the lower right area A14. Therefore, the information of the image data on the division side necessary for performing the grant number notification display G43 set in the second addition effect table is the grant number set in the command during the addition period, that is, in step S2311. It is information of image data indicating the value of the quotient obtained by dividing the grasped number of grants by "4".

When the process of step S2404 or step S2407 is executed, the history image data corresponding to the game history is grasped (step S2408). The history image data includes image data for displaying the remaining continuous game number image G31, image data for displaying the obtained number display image G32, and image data for displaying the remaining given number display image G33. . Based on the various commands received from the main MPU 72, the effect-side MPU 92 determines the number of remaining continuous games in the first additional period or the second additional period, the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5, and the remaining game media in the AT state ST5. can be specified, and history image data corresponding to the specified various information is grasped in step S2408. Also, parameters to be applied to the grasped history image data are grasped (step S2409). This parameter includes information such as coordinates, magnification, and α value applied to history image data, and is fixed information. This fixed information is preset in the performance-side ROM 93 .

After that, if the situation is such that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be notified (step S2410: YES), the stop order image data for displaying the stop order notification image G34 to be displayed this time is grasped ( step S2411). Based on various commands received from the main side MPU 72, the effect side MPU 92 determines whether or not the situation is such that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be notified. The type can be specified, and the stop order image data is grasped in step S2411 according to the specified various information. Also, parameters to be applied to the grasped stopping order image data are grasped (step S2412). This parameter includes information such as coordinates, magnification, and α value applied to stop-order image data, and is fixed information. This fixed information is preset in the performance-side ROM 93 .

When a negative determination is made in step S2410 or when the process of step S2412 is executed, it is determined whether or not the operating device 121 for presentation has been operated during the operation effective period of the operating device 121 for presentation (step S2413). Whether or not it is the operation effective period of the operation device 121 for production is specified from the first addition production table or the second addition production table read out to the production side RAM94. When the effect operating device 121 is operated during the operation effective period (step S2413: YES), the first additional effect table or the second additional effect table read out to the effect side RAM 94 is referred to in this processing cycle. Operation effect image data for displaying the operation notification image G35 is grasped from the data to be applied (step S2414), and parameters to be applied to the operation effect image data are grasped (step S2415). The parameters include information such as coordinates, magnification, and α value applied to the operation effect image data, and are fixed information.

If a negative determination is made in step S2413 or if the process of step S2415 is executed, a rendering list output process is executed (step S2416). In the drawing list output process, information of various image data grasped in steps S2401 to S2415, parameters to be applied to the various image data, and other information are set in the drawing list, and the drawing list after setting is transmitted to the VDP 103. do. In this case, if the 2-split designation information is stored in the register of the effect-side MPU 92 in step S2402, the 2-split designation information is set in the drawing list, and in step S2405 the 4-split designation information is set in the effect-side MPU 92. When stored in the register, the 4-division designation information is set in the drawing list.

The VDP 103 reads the image data from the memory module 101 into the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 according to the received rendering list, and creates rendering data in the frame buffer 106 in a state in which parameters are applied and various processing is performed on the read image data. It is set in the target frame areas 106a and 106b. As a result, the drawing data corresponding to the drawing list is created in the frame areas 106a and 106b, and the created drawing data is set in the image processing device 63b of the image display device 63, whereby the image corresponding to the drawing data is generated. It is displayed on the image display device 63 .

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the divided image rendering process executed by the VDP 103 in the first superimposed period or the second superimposed period. FIGS. 50(a) to 50(d) are explanations for explaining how drawing data is created in the drawing target frame areas 106a and 106b of the frame buffer 106 by executing the drawing processing of the divided image. It is a diagram.

If the received drawing list has 2-split designating information (step S2501: YES), the image data on the split side set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102. Along with this (step S2502), parameters to be applied to the image data on the division side are grasped from the drawing list (step S2503). Then, with the parameters grasped in step S2503 applied, the image data on the division side read out to the expansion buffer 105 in step S2502 is selected from the first and second frame regions 106a and 106b in the frame buffer 106 as the drawing target. is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b (step S2504). In this case, the parameter grasped in step S2503 includes the coordinates and magnification for drawing the image data on the divided side grasped in step S2502 in the left area A1 of the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. ing. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(a), among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be rendered, a first section area DA1 corresponding to the left side area A1 of the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into two. The image data D1 is drawn. The image data D1 on the division side is data for displaying the moving image display G22 for effect, and the same applies to the case where the moving image display G21 for effect and the given number notification display G23 are performed.

After that, the image data D1 on the division side drawn in the first section area DA1 at the time of division into two is divided into two corresponding to the right area A2 on the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. It is copied to the second interval area DA2 of hour (step S2505). As a result, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the same division side is applied to each of the first divided area DA1 when divided into two and the second divided area DA2 when divided into two in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be rendered. The image data D1 is drawn.

After that, the history image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2506). Then, parameters to be applied to the history image data are read out from the drawing list, and the history image data read out in step S2506 are drawn in the frame regions 106a and 106b to be drawn (step S2506). S2507). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(c), image data D2 corresponding to the number-of-remaining-games image G31, image data D3 corresponding to the number-of-acquired-games display image G32, and image data D3 corresponding to the number-of-acquired-games display image G32 are displayed in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. The image data D4 corresponding to the given number display image G33 is drawn. In this case, the remaining continuous game number image G31, the acquired number display image G32, and the remaining given number display image G33 are displayed in front of the effect animation displays G21 and G22 and the given number notification display G23. D2 to D4 are overwritten in the frame regions 106a and 106b to be drawn with the opaque α value applied to the image data D1 on the divided side. However, it may be configured to blend while applying a translucent α value.

After that, if the stop order image data is set in the drawing list (step S2508: YES), the stop order image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the development buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2508: YES). S2509). Then, parameters to be applied to the stop order image data are read out from the drawing list, and in step S2509 the read stop order image data are drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be the drawing target in a state in which the read parameters are applied. (Step S2510). Therefore, image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, the image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 is displayed in the frame area to be drawn so that the stop order notification image G34 is displayed in front of the animation displays G21 and G22 for effect and the number notification display G23. In 106a and 106b, the image data D1 on the division side is overwritten with an opaque α value applied. However, it may be configured to blend while applying a translucent α value.

After that, if the operation effect image data is set in the drawing list (step S2511: YES), the operation effect image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2511: YES). S2512). Then, the parameters to be applied to the operation effect image data are read from the drawing list, and the operation effect image data read out in step S2512 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn in a state in which the read parameters are applied. (Step S2513). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(d), the image data D5 corresponding to the operation notification image G35 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, the image data D5 corresponding to the operation notification image G35 is displayed in the frame area 106a to be drawn so that the operation notification image G35 is displayed in front of the moving image displays G21 and G22 for effect and the number notification display G23. , 106b, the image data D1 on the divided side is overwritten with the opaque α value applied. However, it may be configured to blend while applying a translucent α value.

If 2-split designation information is not set in the received drawing list (step S2501: NO), that is, if 4-split designation information is set, the split-side image data set in the drawing list is The data is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2514), and the parameters to be applied to the image data on the divided side are grasped from the drawing list (step S2515). Then, in a state in which the parameters grasped in step S2515 are applied, the image data on the divided side read out to the expansion buffer 105 in step S2514 is selected from the first and second frame regions 106a and 106b in the frame buffer 106 as the drawing target. are drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b (step S2516). In this case, the parameter grasped in step S2515 is set with the coordinates and magnification for drawing the image data on the divided side grasped in step S2514 in the upper left region A11 of the frame regions 106a and 106b to be drawn. It is Therefore, the image data on the divided side is drawn in the first section area at the time of the 4-division corresponding to the upper left area A11 of the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn.

After that, the image data on the division side drawn in the first section area at the time of the 4-division is applied to the image data at the time of the 4-division corresponding to the upper right area A12 of the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. , the third divided area corresponding to the lower left area A13, and the fourth divided area corresponding to the lower right area A14 (step S2517). As a result, each of the first divided area when divided into four, the second divided area when divided into four, the third divided area when divided into four, and the fourth divided area when divided into four in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn is obtained. , the image data of the same divided side is drawn.

After that, the history image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2506). Then, parameters to be applied to the history image data are read out from the drawing list, and the history image data read out in step S2506 are drawn in the frame regions 106a and 106b to be drawn (step S2506). S2507). Therefore, the image data corresponding to the remaining number of continuous games image G31, the image data corresponding to the obtained number display image G32, and the image data corresponding to the remaining given number display image G33 are drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. state. In this case, the remaining continuous game number image G31, the acquired number display image G32, and the remaining given number display image G33 are displayed in front of the effect animation displays G41 and G42 and the given number notification display G43. is overwritten in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be rendered with an opaque α value applied to the image data on the divided side. However, it may be configured to blend while applying a translucent α value.

After that, if the stop order image data is set in the drawing list (step S2508: YES), the stop order image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the development buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2508: YES). S2509). Then, parameters to be applied to the stop order image data are read out from the drawing list, and in step S2509 the read stop order image data are drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be the drawing target in a state in which the read parameters are applied. (Step S2510). Therefore, image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, the image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 is displayed in the frame area to be drawn so that the stop order notification image G34 is displayed in front of the animation displays G41 and G42 for effect and the number notification display G43. In 106a and 106b, the image data on the division side is overwritten with the opaque α value applied. However, it may be configured to blend while applying a translucent α value.

After that, if the operation effect image data is set in the drawing list (step S2511: YES), the operation effect image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the development buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2511: YES). S2512). Then, the parameters to be applied to the operation effect image data are read out from the drawing list, and the operation effect image data read out in step S2512 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn in a state in which the read parameters are applied. (Step S2513). Therefore, the image data corresponding to the operation notification image G35 is rendered in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be rendered. In this case, the image data corresponding to the operation notification image G35 is displayed in the frame areas 106a, 106a, 106a, 106a, 106a, 106a, 106a, 106a, 106a, 106a, 106a, 106-1, 106-1, 106-1, 106-1, respectively. In 106b, the image data on the division side is overwritten with the opaque α value applied. However, it may be configured to blend while applying a translucent α value.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

By setting the image data D1 at the time of division to each of the first divisional area DA1 at the time of division into two and the second divisional area DA2 at the time of division into two in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn, the image display device 63 Moving image displays G21 and G22 for effects and a given number notification display G23 are displayed in the left area A1 and the right area A2 on the display surface, respectively. As a result, when the moving image displays G21 and G22 for effect and the given number notification display G23 are displayed respectively in the left area A1 and the right area A2 on the display surface of the image display device 63, the same image data can be used to display two images. It is only necessary to set the same image data D1 at the time of division in each of the first divided area DA1 at the time of division and the second divided area DA2 at the time of division into two. Therefore, the display on the image display device 63 can be favorably performed.

The image data D1 at the time of division drawn using the image data in the first divided area DA1 at the time of division is copied to the second divided area DA2 at the time of division, so that the second divided area DA2 at the time of division Image data D1 at the time of division is set. As a result, the processing load is reduced compared to a configuration in which image data is used to draw the image data D1 at the time of division for each of the first divided area DA1 at the time of division and the second divided area DA2 at the time of division. becomes possible. Further, it is possible to set the image data D1 at the time of division in the second divided area DA2 at the time of division using the image data D1 at the time of division drawn in the first divided area DA1 at the time of division.

The left area A1 and the right side area A1 and the right side area A1 of the image display device 63 are displayed in a state in which the same effect moving image displays G21 and G22 and the given number notification display G23 are displayed in the left side area A1 and the right side area A2, respectively. A remaining continuous game number image G31, an acquired number display image G32, a remaining given number display image G33, a stop order notification image G34, and an operation notification image G35, which are not images displayed with the same content, are displayed in each of the areas A2. As a result, attention is paid to the effect moving image displays G21 and G22 and the given number notification display G23 displayed in the left area A1 and the right side area A2, respectively, and the effect moving image displays G21 and G22 and the given number notification display G23 are displayed. Display contents different from the left area A1 and right area A2 are displayed independently of the remaining continuous game number image G31, the acquired number display image G32, the remaining awarded number display image G33, the stop order notification image G34, and the operation It becomes possible to provide by the notification image G35. Therefore, the display on the image display device 63 can be favorably performed.

In the left side area A1 and the right side area A2, the moving image displays G21 and G22 for effect and the award number notification display G23 are displayed, and the remaining continuous game number image G31, the acquired number display image G32, and the remaining award number display image G33 are displayed. , the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 are displayed. Since it is displayed as if it exists in front of the area A1 and the right area A2, the remaining continuous game number image G31, the acquired number display image G32, the remaining awarded number display image G33, the stop order notification image G34, and the operation notification image. It becomes possible to make G35 stand out.

The moving image displays G21 and G22 for effect and the given number notification display G23 are displayed within the ranges of the left side area A1 and the right side area A2, respectively, while the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 are displayed in the left side area A1. and the left side area A1 and the right side area A2 so as to straddle the boundary of the right side area A2. As a result, it is possible to display the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 in sizes larger than those of the moving image displays G21 and G22 for effect and the number of bonuses notification display G23.

In the first addition period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into left area A1 and right area A2. It is divided into four areas, an upper right area A12, a lower left area A13, and a lower right area A14. As a result, it is possible to diversify the display contents when displaying the moving image displays G21, G22, G41 and G42 for effect and the given number notification displays G23 and G43 using a plurality of display areas.

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described fourth embodiment in the processing configuration of the divided image drawing processing. The configuration different from that of the fourth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing divided image drawing processing in this embodiment executed by the VDP 103 .

If the received drawing list has 2-split designation information (step S2601: YES), the image data on the split side set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the development buffer 105 of the VRAM 102. Along with this (step S2602), parameters to be applied to the image data on the division side are grasped from the rendering list (step S2603). Then, with the parameters grasped in step S2603 applied, the divided image data read out to the development buffer 105 in step S2602 is rendered in the development buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2604).

After that, magnification setting processing for splitting into two is executed (step S2605). In the magnification setting process for dividing into two, the size of the drawing data drawn in the expansion buffer 105 in step S2604 corresponds to the left side area A1 of the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. The size of the drawing data is changed so as to be the same as the size of the first section area DA1 when divided into two. Then, the drawing data after the size change is divided into the first section area DA1 corresponding to the left side area A1 on the display surface of the image display device 63 and the image display area of the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. It is copied to each of the second segment areas DA2 at the time of division corresponding to the right area A2 of the display surface of the device 63 (step S2606). As a result, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the same division side is applied to each of the first divided area DA1 when divided into two and the second divided area DA2 when divided into two in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be rendered. The image data D1 is drawn.

After that, the processing of steps S2607 to S2614 is executed. The processing contents of steps S2607 to S2614 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2506 to S2513 in the divided image rendering process (FIG. 49) in the fourth embodiment.

If the 2-split designation information is not set in the received drawing list (step S2601: NO), that is, if the 4-split designation information is set, the split-side image data set in the drawing list is The data is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2615), and the parameters to be applied to the image data on the divided side are grasped from the drawing list (step S2616). Then, with the parameters grasped in step S2616 applied, the divided image data read out to the development buffer 105 in step S2615 is rendered in the development buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2617).

After that, magnification setting processing for 4-division is executed (step S2618). In the magnification setting process for the 4-division, the size of the drawing data drawn in the expansion buffer 105 in step S2617 is set to the upper left area A11 of the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. The size of the drawing data is changed so as to be the same as the size of the corresponding first section area when divided into four. Then, the drawing data after the size change is applied to the first section area when divided into four corresponding to the upper left area A11 of the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn, and the image display. A second segmented region corresponding to the upper right region A12 of the display surface of the device 63, a third segmented region corresponding to the lower left region A13 of the display surface of the image display device 63, and the image display device 63 is copied to each of the fourth partitioned areas corresponding to the lower right area A14 of the display surface (step S2619). As a result, each of the first section area when divided into four, the second section area when divided into four, the third section area when divided into four, and the fourth section area when divided into four in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn is obtained. , the image data of the same divided side is drawn.

After that, the processing of steps S2607 to S2614 is executed. The processing contents of steps S2607 to S2614 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2506 to S2513 in the divided image rendering process (FIG. 49) in the fourth embodiment.

According to the above configuration, the image data on the divided side is once drawn in the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102, and the drawn image data on the divided side is displayed in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn in the case of two-split display. is copied to each of the first section area when divided into two and the second section area when divided into two, and the first section when divided into four in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn when performing a four-split display. 2nd section area when divided into 4 areas, 3rd section area when divided into 4 areas, and 4th section area when divided into 4 areas. As a result, the image display device can perform two-split display without drawing data drawn in a part of the frame regions 106a and 106b to be drawn in other regions of the frame regions 106a and 106b. It is possible to display the same moving image displays G21 and G22 for effect and the given number notification display G23 in the left side area A1 and the right side area A2 of 63, respectively. It is possible to display the same animation displays G41 and G42 for effect and the given number notification display G43 in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, respectively.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of each embodiment described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. In addition, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following other forms may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. good.

(1) In the first embodiment, the AT state ST5 is not limited to the configuration in which the AT state ST5 ends when the remaining number of game media provided in the AT state ST5 becomes "0". The AT state ST5 may end when the number of remaining continuous games in ST5 becomes "0". The AT state ST5 may be ended by the AT state ST5. Even in this case, in the case of the false omen state or the real omen state, the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 becomes "0", or the predetermined number of wins established in the AT state ST5 is the upper limit number of times. The AT state ST5 may be continued even if the AT state ST5 becomes.

(2) In the above-described first embodiment, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0" in the false portent state, and the AT state ST5 is continued. When winning, the number of grants selected in the direct hit winning is not limited to the configuration in which the number is granted immediately, and the number of grants is granted when the false omen state during execution ends. good too. In this case, even if game media are awarded in the situation where the false portent state continues, the remaining number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5 is maintained at "0", and the false portent state ends and the AT state is reached. Due to the awarding of game media generated in the situation where ST5 continues, the number of awarding due to the above-mentioned direct hit win is subject to subtraction. Therefore, the AT state ST5 tends to continue longer.

(3) In the above-described first embodiment, in the case of the false portent state, if the additional lottery process (step S1103) results in a false portent winning, the number of remaining continuous games in the false portent state may be increased. good. For example, if a false omen is won in a false omen state, the initial number of continuous games of 10 games is reset as the remaining number of continuous games in the false omen state, thereby increasing the remaining number of continuous games. Alternatively, the remaining number of continuous games may be increased by adding 10 games, which is the initial number of continuous games, to the remaining number of continuous games in the false omen state. If the event occurs in the false portent state and the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is "0", the number of games required to end the continuing AT state ST5 is substantially As a result, the player expects a false omen winning.

In addition, even if a false sign is won in a false sign state in a situation where the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is not "0", the AT does not increase the number of remaining continuous games in the false sign state. In the state where the remaining number of game media to be provided in state ST5 is "0", if a false omen win is obtained in the false omen state, the number of remaining continuous games in the false omen state may be increased. Thus, in a situation where the false portent state is provided as a mere performance, even if a false portent win occurs, the AT state ST5 is continued by the false portent state while preventing the number of remaining games to be continued in the false portent state from increasing. In such a situation, it is possible to substantially increase the number of games required until the continuing AT state ST5 ends due to the occurrence of the false omen winning.

(4) In the first embodiment described above, in the case of the false omen state, if the additional lottery process (step S1103) results in a real omen win, the state is promoted to the omen state and the remaining omen state continues. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of games is greater than the remaining number of continuous games in the false portent state up to that point. For example, if the real omen is won in the false omen state, the initial number of continuous games of 10 games is reset as the remaining number of continuous games in the real omen state, thereby increasing the remaining number of continuous games. Alternatively, the remaining number of continuous games may be increased by adding 10 games, which is the initial number of continuous games, to the remaining number of continuous games in the false omen state. If the event occurs in the false portent state and the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is "0", the number of games required to end the continuing AT state ST5 is substantially Therefore, the player expects to win the main omen.

In addition, even if the real omen is won in the false omen state in the situation where the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is not "0", the remaining false omen state continues in the subsequent main omen state. The number of games is inherited, and if the real omen is won in the false omen state in the situation where the remaining number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5 is "0", the remaining number of continuous games in the subsequent omen state is changed. It may be configured to increase the number of remaining games to be continued in the false portent state up to. As a result, in a situation where the false portent state is provided as a mere presentation, even if the main portent win occurs, the AT state ST5 by the false portent state is prevented from increasing the number of remaining games to be continued in the main portent state after that. continues, it is possible to substantially increase the number of games required until the continuing AT state ST5 is terminated by the occurrence of this omen win.

(5) In the above-described first embodiment, in the case of the main omen state, if the additional lottery process (step S1103) results in a false omen win or a main omen win, the number of remaining continuous games in the main omen state is increased. It is good also as a structure which carries out. For example, if a false omen win or a bona fide win occurs in the present omen state, the remaining continuation game number of 10 games, which is the initial number of continued games, is reset as the remaining number of games to be continued in the omen state. The number of games may be increased, or the remaining number of continuous games may be increased by adding 10 games, which is the initial number of continuous games, to the remaining number of continuous games in this precursor state. If the event occurs in this precursor state and the remaining number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5 is "0", the number of games required to end the continuing AT state ST5 is substantially As a result, the player expects a false omen win or a real omen win.

In addition, even if a false omen win or a bona fide win occurs in this omen state in a situation where the remaining given number of game media in the AT state ST5 is not "0", the number of remaining continuation games in this omen state is increased. However, if a false omen win or a bona fide win occurs in this omen state in a situation where the remaining number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5 is "0", the remaining number of continuous games in this omen state is counted. It is good also as a structure which makes it increase. As a result, in a situation where this precursory state is provided as a mere effect, even if a false omen win or a bona fide win occurs, the number of remaining continuation games in this precursory state is not increased, and the AT by this precursory state. In the situation where the state ST5 continues, the number of games required until the continuing AT state ST5 ends can be substantially increased by the occurrence of false omen winning or real omen winning.

(6) In the above-described first embodiment, in the situation where the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is "0" in the false omen state or the real omen state, a direct hit is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103). In such a case, a configuration may be adopted in which a larger number of grants is more likely to be granted than in the case of direct hit winning in the additional lottery process (step S1103) in other situations. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of direct hit winning in the situation where the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is "0" in the false omen state or the real omen state.

(7) In the second and third embodiments, even if the index value IV=17 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the right reel 32R must be stopped first or the main A configuration may be adopted in which the advantage of adding 1 to the value of the transition advantage counter of the main side RAM 74 is not provided unless the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol on the line ML is stopped. . In addition, even if the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the right reel 32R must be stopped first, or "RED 7" will appear on the main line ML. A configuration may be adopted in which the advantage of adding 1 to the value of the transition advantage counter of the main side RAM 74 is not provided unless the combination of the symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol is stopped. Also, even if the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) of the combination in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the right reel 32R must be stopped first or the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. , The advantage of adding 2 to the value of the transition advantage counter in the main side RAM 74 may not be granted unless the combination of the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol is stopped.

(8) In the above-described second and third embodiments, when the index value IV=17 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the first special replay prize is won only when the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time. can be established, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that the first special replay prize can be established only when the middle reel 32M is first stopped, and the middle reel 32M or the right reel A configuration may be adopted in which the first special replay prize can be established when 32R is stopped for the first time.

(9) In the above-described second and third embodiments, when the index value IV=18 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the first special replay prize is won only when the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time. Alternatively, the configuration is such that the second special replay prize can be established, but it is not limited to this, and the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize is established only when the middle reel 32M is first stopped. Alternatively, the first special replay winning prize or the second special replay winning prize may be established when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped.

(10) In the above-described second and third embodiments, when the index value IV=18 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the first special replay prize is won when the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time. can be established, the second special replay prize cannot be established, and when the middle reel 32M is stopped for the first time, the second special replay prize can be established, but the first special replay prize is established. It is good also as composition which becomes impossibility. In this case, when the index value IV=17 or 18 is won in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and when the index value IV=17 is won in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the first stop is the right reel. 32R, when the red 7 notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that the symbol "red 7" should be aimed at on the main line ML, and the index value IV=18 is won in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. , the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed by making it possible for the player to recognize that the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML should be aimed at. The second special replay winning is established when the index value IV = 18 is won in the first half of the situation, and the first special replay winning is established when the index value IV = 18 is won in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. It is possible to reduce the probability of

(11) In the above second and third embodiments, when the first special replay winning prize or the second special replay winning prize is established in a situation other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the replay winning is established as the first irregular notification sound. Although the configuration is such that a notification sound is output so that the player can recognize the event, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the first irregular notification sound, a notification sound that clearly indicates that the transition to the AT state ST5 is not triggered may be output, and a notification sound that clearly indicates that the current state is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is output. It may be configured to be

(12) In the above second and third embodiments, when the first special replay winning prize or the second special replay winning prize is established in a situation other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the first irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62. On the other hand, the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 are configured so that the irregular notification is not performed, but the configuration is not limited to this, and in addition to the configuration in which the first irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, or Alternatively, the upper lamp 61 may emit light corresponding to the first irregularity, and the image display device 63 may display an image corresponding to the first irregularity.

(13) In the second and third embodiments, when the second special replay prize is established in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the speaker 62 outputs the second irregular notification sound, while the upper lamp 61 outputs the second irregular notification sound. And the image display device 63 has a configuration in which the irregular notification is not executed, but it is not limited to this, and in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the second irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, the upper lamp 61 , the image display device 63 may be configured to emit light corresponding to the second irregularity, or to display an image corresponding to the second irregularity in the image display device 63 .

(14) In the above-described third embodiment, in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the third irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62 when the first special replay prize is established even though the index value IV=18 is won. On the other hand, the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 are configured so that the irregular notification is not performed, but the configuration is not limited to this, and in addition to the configuration in which the third irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, or Alternatively, the upper lamp 61 may emit light corresponding to the third irregularity, and the image display device 63 may display an image corresponding to the third irregularity.

(15) In the above-described second and third embodiments, when the index value IV=18 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), red 7 is announced in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Although the BAR notification is executed in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the player wins with the index value IV=18 in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the player is urged to establish the first special replay prize by executing the red 7 notification, and the player wins with the index value IV=18 in the AT state ST5. In this case, the player may be prompted to establish the second special replay prize by executing BAR notification. In this case, when the index value IV=18 is won in a state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the first special replay prize is established, the corresponding irregular notification is executed, and the index value in a state other than the AT state ST5. If IV=18 is won and the second special replay prize is established, the corresponding irregular notification may be executed.

(16) In the above-described second and third embodiments, when the index value IV=17 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the transition advantage counter in the main side RAM 74 is reliably counted. Although the value is configured to be incremented by 1, it is not limited to this, and the lottery process is executed when the index value IV=17 is won, and when the lottery process wins, the main side RAM 74 1 may be added to the value of the transition advantageous counter in . In this case, when winning is won in the lottery process, the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the red 7 notification indicating that the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML should be aimed at is executed, and the winning lottery process is executed. It is preferable that the red 7 notification is not executed when the player is out of line.

(17) In the above-described second and third embodiments, when the index value IV=18 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the transition time in the main side RAM 74 is ensured. Although the value of the advantage counter is incremented by 1, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery process is executed when the index value IV=18 is won, and when the lottery process wins the lottery. A configuration may be adopted in which 1 is added to the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 . In this case, when winning is won in the lottery process, the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the red 7 notification indicating that the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML should be aimed at is executed, and the winning lottery process is executed. It is preferable that the red 7 notification is not executed when the player is out of line.

(18) In the above second and third embodiments, when the index value IV=18 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the transition time in the main side RAM 74 is ensured. Although the value of the advantage counter is incremented by 2, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery process is executed when the index value IV=18 is won, and when the lottery process wins the lottery. A configuration in which 2 is added to the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 may be employed. In this case, when the lottery process wins, a BAR notification is executed indicating that the first stop is the right reel 32R and the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML should be aimed at. It is preferable that the BAR notification is not executed when the deviation occurs.

(19) In the above-described fourth and fifth embodiments, the display surface of the image display device 63 is horizontally divided into two areas in the first additional period to partition the left area A1 and the right area A2. However, the display surface of the image display device 63 may be divided into two in the vertical direction during the first superposition period to divide the area into an upper area and a lower area. Further, in the second superposition period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into two in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, respectively, so that it is divided into an upper left area A11, an upper right area A12, a lower left area A13, and a lower right area A14. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display surface of the image display device 63 may be vertically divided into four in the second additional period to divide into four display areas. It is good also as a structure which divides into four display areas by dividing into four directions.

(20) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into a plurality of display areas. However, it may be configured to occur in other circumstances. In addition, as effects for dividing the display surface of the image display device 63 into a plurality of display areas, a two-division effect and a four-division effect are set. , a 5-split effect, an 8-split effect, and a 9-split effect may be present.

(21) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the image data D1 at the time of division is copied to at least the second divided area DA2 at the time of division into two of the frame areas 106a and 106b to be rendered. , but not limited to this, the image data D1 at the time of division is drawn using the image data for the first divided area DA1 at the time of division into two, and the second division area DA2 at the time of division into two is drawn. On the other hand, the image data may be used to draw the image data D1 at the time of division. Even in this case, the image data used for drawing the image data D1 when divided into the first divided area DA1 when divided into two and the second divided area DA2 when divided into two are divided. Since the image data used for drawing the divided image data D1 is the same as the image data used for drawing the divided image data D1, it is possible to reduce the amount of image data read from the memory module 101 for drawing the divided image data D1. Become.

(22) In the above-described fourth and fifth embodiments, the same image is displayed in each of the left side area A1 and the right side area A2 on the display surface of the image display device 63 as the animation display G21, G22 for effect or the given number notification display G23. is displayed, it may be configured to display a different image. Even in this case, by displaying the stop order notification image G34 or the operation notification image G35 across the left area A1 and the right area A2, the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 can be made conspicuous. It becomes possible.

(23) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the effective line is only one main line ML, and the configuration may be such that the effective line is two, three, or four or more. In this case, the number of activated lines may increase as the number of betted game media increases, or the maximum number of activated lines may be set regardless of the number of betted game media.

(24) The type of information transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 is not limited to those in the above embodiments. Information on the number of game media played may be transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 . In this case, the information on the number of game media to be provided by winning can be notified on the image display device 63 or the like. Further, even if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, if the rotation of some of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped or stopped, the information corresponding to that is sent to the main side. It may be configured to be transmitted from the MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 . In this case, the image display device 63 or the like can perform an effect corresponding to the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that medals are paid out when a small winning combination is won. If it is For example, it may be configured such that prizes other than medals are paid out when a minor win is established. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have actual medal insertion and medal payout functions and that manages the medals owned by the player as credits, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the granting of benefits.

(26) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B-type slot machine, a C-type, a combination of A and C types, a combination of B and C types, RT games, CT games or ART machines. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a type equipped with games. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which there is a bonus state that is advantageous to the player.

(27) The symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., and may be geometric lines, figures, and the like. Also, it is possible to compose a pattern with light, color, etc., and a pattern can be configured with a three-dimensional shape, etc., or a composite of these can compose a pattern. In other words, the pattern may be anything as long as it functions as identifiable information.

(28) In each of the above-described embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 was shown, but the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which games are played using game balls as game media. You may apply it to the game machine of the form which fused with the machine.

(29) The characteristic configurations of the above-described first to fifth embodiments may be mutually applied in arbitrary combinations. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment may be combined. You may combine the characteristic structure of a form, and the characteristic structure of the said 5th Embodiment. In addition, any combination of the configurations of the different modes may be applied to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to fifth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. A continuation criterion storage means (AT continuation counter 74e in the first embodiment) is generated based on the fact that the game is executed in an advantageous gaming state (AT state ST5) that is advantageous to the player and an update opportunity (playing media is provided) occurs. information updating means (function for executing the process of step S1204 of the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment) for updating the continuation reference information stored in the
Terminating means for terminating the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the continuation reference information becomes the termination information (function for executing the processing of steps S1213 to S1215 of the main side MPU 72 in the first embodiment);
Even if the continuation reference information becomes the end information when the advantageous game state is in a predetermined effect execution situation (false portent state), the advantageous game state is terminated without ending the advantageous game state by the termination means. State continuation means for continuing (function of making a negative determination in step S1212 of the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic A1, in the case of the predetermined effect execution situation, even if the continuation reference information becomes end information, the advantageous game state is continued without ending. As a result, even if the continuation reference information becomes the end information, it is possible to create a situation in which the advantageous gaming state can continue. Also, it is possible to prevent the predetermined performance execution situation from ending halfway along with the end of the advantageous game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A2. When the advantageous game state is in the predetermined performance execution situation, the continuation reference information becomes the end information, and the advantageous game state is continued, and the continuation reference information is the end information. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the advantageous game state is terminated when the predetermined effect execution state is terminated.

According to the feature A2, when the advantageous game state is continued even if the continuation reference information is the end information due to the predetermined effect execution situation, or when the predetermined effect execution situation ends while the continuation reference information is the end information. The advantageous game state also ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantageous game state from continuing excessively.

Feature A3. Predetermined updating means (first function to execute the processing of step S1105 of the main side MPU 72 in the embodiment),
The predetermined update means updates the continuation reference information so as to move away from the end information based on the occurrence of the predetermined opportunity while the advantageous gaming state is continued by the state continuation means. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2.

According to feature A3, the continuation reference information is updated to the side away from the end information based on the occurrence of the predetermined opportunity in the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, the player expects that the predetermined opportunity will occur in the advantageous game state. In this case, even if the continuation reference information is end information because of the predetermined effect execution situation, if the advantageous gaming state is continued, if a predetermined opportunity occurs in this continuing situation, the continuation reference information is updated away from the end information. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the predetermined opportunity will occur even in the continued situation.

Feature A4. The predetermined effect execution state continues over a predetermined number of games, which is the number of games, and in each game in the predetermined effect execution state, the execution content of the effect is determined in a manner corresponding to the predetermined effect execution state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3.

According to feature A4, the predetermined effect execution state continues over a predetermined number of games, which is the number of games, and in each game in the predetermined effect execution state, the execution content of the effect is determined in a manner corresponding to the predetermined effect execution state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a series of effects over a plurality of games in a predetermined effect execution situation. In this case, the configuration of the feature A1 is provided, and even if the continuation reference information becomes the end information in the case of the predetermined effect execution situation, the advantageous game state is continued without ending. It is possible to prevent a series of performances over a plurality of games from ending halfway along with the end of an advantageous game state.

Feature A5. Predetermined effect start means for starting the predetermined effect execution situation based on the occurrence of the effect start opportunity (function for executing the processing of steps S1116 to S1118 of the main side MPU 72 in the first embodiment),
The predetermined performance starting means is characterized in that even if the performance start opportunity occurs in the predetermined performance execution situation, the predetermined performance execution situation being executed is continued instead of newly starting the predetermined performance execution situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4.

According to the feature A5, even if an effect start opportunity occurs in a predetermined effect execution situation, the predetermined effect execution situation is continued without being newly started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined performance execution situation from continuing excessively.

Feature A6. The predetermined effect execution state continues over a predetermined number of games, which is the number of multiple games,
The game machine according to feature A5, characterized in that the predetermined performance starting means does not increase the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined performance execution situation even if the performance start opportunity occurs in the predetermined performance execution situation.

According to the characteristic A6, even if a performance start opportunity occurs in a predetermined performance execution situation, the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined performance execution situation is not increased, so that the predetermined performance execution situation is prevented from continuing excessively. becomes possible.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein the predetermined performance execution status does not trigger updating of the continuation reference information to a side away from the end information.

According to feature A7, even though the predetermined production execution situation does not trigger updating of the continuation reference information to the side away from the end information, it is assumed that the continuation reference information becomes the end information in the case of the predetermined production execution situation. Also, the advantageous game state is continued without ending. As a result, in a situation where the continuation reference information is not the end information, the predetermined effect execution situation having only a role as an effect that does not give a change to the profit of the player is changed to an advantageous game state in a situation where the continuation reference information is the end information. can be made to continue, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the predetermined effect execution situation.

Feature A8. The state continuation means terminates the advantageous game state by the termination means even if the continuation reference information becomes the end information in the case of a specific performance execution situation (main precursor state) in the advantageous game state. Continue the advantageous gaming state without
The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the specific effect execution status serves as a trigger for updating the continuation reference information to a side away from the end information.

According to the feature A8, even if the continuation reference information becomes the end information in the specific performance execution situation, the advantageous game state continues, and the specific performance execution situation updates the continuation reference information to the side away from the end information. Opportunity. As a result, even if the continuation reference information becomes the end information, the player expects that the specific effect execution state is reached when the advantageous game state is continued due to the predetermined effect execution state or the specific effect execution state. It will be done.

Feature A9. When the continuation reference information is not the end information in the predetermined effect execution situation, the information updating means brings the continuation reference information closer to the end information based on the occurrence of the update opportunity due to execution of the game. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that the update to .

According to feature A9, when the continuation criterion information is not end information even in a predetermined performance execution situation, the game is executed and the continuation criterion information is updated closer to the end information based on the generation of the update opportunity. be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantage of being in the predetermined effect execution situation from becoming too high.

Any one or more of features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, and features E1 to E7 may be applied to the features A1 to A9. good. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The invention of the above feature group A can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a storage section for storing game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and directed to a game area in response to a player's shooting operation. is fired. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. be.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals is betted and a new game is started by operating a start lever, a lottery process is executed by a control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets the game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the game is executed;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern display for controlling the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is regarded as establishment of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination. Winning response control means for executing corresponding control (function for executing medium provision processing and response processing at the end of the game in the main side MPU 72);
In a game machine equipped with
A special combination (index value IV=17 or 18 in the second and third embodiments) is set as a winning combination in the lottery process for the combination,
The pattern display control means, when the special combination is won, operates in a predetermined stop mode (a stop operation mode in which the right reel 32R is first stopped and a "red 7" symbol is aimed on the main line ML, or a stop operation mode in which the right reel 32R is aimed at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML). 1 stop and aim at the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML) based on the operation of the stop operation means, the predetermined stop result ("Red 7" symbol in the second and third embodiments) or a combination of "BAR" symbols) can be displayed,
This game machine is
Predetermined notification target situation (pseudo bonus state ST4 when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols, second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols) If the special combination is won in the above, a special notification that allows the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in the predetermined stop mode (if the predetermined stop result is a combination of "Red 7" symbols, Red 7 notification, BAR notification when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols) is executed (when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "Red 7" symbols: The function of executing the processing of steps S1406 to S1408 and steps S1410 to S1411 of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1502 of the effect side MPU 92, and the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols. In the case of: the function of executing the processing of steps S1412 and S1413 of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1504 of the effect side MPU 92),
A predetermined non-announcement situation in which the special combination is won but the special notification is not executed (if the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols, the situation is not a pseudo bonus state ST4, the predetermined stop result is " BAR symbol combination, the situation is not the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4), the predetermined display notification is given based on the display of the predetermined stop result by operating the stop operation means in the predetermined stop mode. (If the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols, the first irregular notification sound in the second and third embodiments or the third irregular notification sound in the third embodiment, the predetermined stop result is Predetermined display notification control means for executing a first irregular notification sound or a second irregular notification sound in the case of a combination of "BAR" symbols (predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols) If there is: the function of executing the processing of step S1704 of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment and the function of executing the processing of step S1510 in the effect side MPU 92, step S1803 or step S1806 of the main side MPU 72 in the third embodiment When the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols: the function of executing the process of step S1707 or step S1710 of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment and the step S1510 of the effect side MPU 92 or A function of executing the process of step S1512, a function of executing the process of step S1809 or step S1812 of the main MPU 72 in the third embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, when a special combination is won in a predetermined notification target situation, a special notification is executed that allows the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in a predetermined stop mode. By operating the stop operation means in a predetermined stop mode according to the notification, it is possible to display the predetermined stop result. In this case, the predetermined display notification is executed based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in the predetermined stop mode and the predetermined stop result is displayed in a predetermined non-notification situation in which the special combination is won but the special notification is not executed. be done. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the predetermined stop result has been displayed in a situation where the predetermined stop result should not have been displayed, and the player is not confused by the display of the predetermined stop result. It is possible to prevent it from being lost. Therefore, it is possible to make the game preferably performed.

Feature B2. The pattern display means includes a plurality of pattern display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying the pattern,
The predetermined stop mode includes a mode in which the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of the pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order (first stop of the right reel 32R),
When the special combination is won, the predetermined stop result may not be displayed even if the stop operation means is operated so as to stop the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of the pattern display areas in the predetermined stop order. is the configuration,
The predetermined display notification control means is configured to stop the predetermined stop even if the stop operation means is operated so that the variable display of the pattern in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in the predetermined stop order in the predetermined non-notification situation. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the predetermined display notification is not executed when the result is not displayed.

According to feature B2, even if the variable display of patterns is stopped in a predetermined stop order in a predetermined non-notification situation, if the predetermined stop result is not displayed, the predetermined display notification is not executed. As a result, it is possible to limit the situation in which the predetermined display/notification is executed to the situation in which the predetermined stop result is displayed in the predetermined non-notification state, thereby preventing the predetermined display/notification from being excessively executed. becomes possible.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the player is not penalized even if the predetermined stop result is displayed in the predetermined non-notification situation.

According to feature B3, when a predetermined stop result is displayed in a predetermined non-notification situation, a predetermined display notification is executed, but no penalty is given to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent disadvantages from being caused to the player who causes the predetermined stop result to be displayed in a predetermined non-notification situation due to an operation error.

Feature B4. When a predetermined event, which is either winning the special combination or displaying the predetermined stop result, occurs in the predetermined notification target situation, a predetermined profit is given to the player, and the predetermined non- Predetermined profit providing means that does not provide the predetermined profit to the player even if the predetermined event occurs in the notification situation (when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols: the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment A function of executing the processing of step S1604 or step S1608, and when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols: a function of executing the processing of step S1610 of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized by:

According to feature B4, when a predetermined event, which is either winning a special role or displaying a predetermined stop result, occurs in a predetermined notification target situation, a predetermined profit is given to the player, and a predetermined In the configuration in which the predetermined profit is not given even if the predetermined event occurs in the non-notification state, the predetermined display notification is executed when the predetermined stop result is displayed in the predetermined non-notification state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the fact that the predetermined profit was not awarded despite the display of the predetermined stop result in the predetermined non-notification situation.

Feature B5. A specific profit giving means (predetermined When the stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols: the function of executing the replay profit of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment, when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols: the second A function of executing the replay profit of the main side MPU 72 in the embodiment and a function of executing the processing of step S1604 or step S1608 of the main side MPU 72),
The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the predetermined display notification is executed so as to allow the player to recognize that the specific profit has been awarded.

According to the feature B5, when a special winning combination is won in a predetermined non-notification situation and a predetermined stop result is displayed, a special combination winning and a predetermined stop result are displayed in a predetermined notification target state. In a configuration in which a specific profit that is less advantageous to the player than the predetermined profit that is given to the player when a predetermined event occurs, a specific profit is awarded to the player in a predetermined non-notification situation is won and a predetermined stop result is displayed, a predetermined display notification is executed so that the player can recognize that the specific profit has been awarded. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize that a specific profit is given instead of a predetermined profit when a specific combination is won in a predetermined non-notification situation and a predetermined stop result is displayed.

Feature B6. Characteristic feature B5, characterized in that the specific profit giving means gives the specific profit to the player regardless of the stop result when the special role is won in the predetermined non-reporting situation. game machine.

According to feature B6, in a configuration in which a specific profit is given to a player regardless of the stop result when a special role is won in a predetermined non-announcement situation, a specific profit is awarded to a player in a predetermined non-announcement situation. When a winning result is displayed and a predetermined stop result is displayed, a predetermined display notification is executed so that the player can recognize that the specific profit has been awarded, so the predetermined stop result is displayed in a predetermined non-notification situation. It is possible to make the player aware that the being played does not affect the profit.

Feature B7. The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, wherein the specific benefit is a benefit of replay.

According to the feature B7, in the configuration in which the benefit of replaying is given as the specific benefit, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects.

Feature B8. The symbol display control means, when the special combination is won, operates in a specific stop mode (a stop operation mode in which the right reel 32R is first stopped and a "red 7" symbol is aimed on the main line ML, in this case, a predetermined stop mode). is the first stop of the right reel 32R and a specific stop result (combination of "red 7" symbols, In this case, the predetermined stop result enables the combination of "BAR" symbols to be displayed,
In the game machine, when the special combination is won in a specific notification target situation (the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, in this case, the predetermined notification target situation is the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4), the specific stop mode is used. Predetermined notification control means (in the second embodiment The function of executing the processing of step S1410 to step S1411 of the main side MPU72, the function of executing the processing of step S1502 of the effect side MPU92, in this case, the special notification control means is the step S1412 of the main side MPU72 in the second embodiment ~ A function to execute the processing of step S1413, a function to execute the processing of step S1504 of the production side MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the predetermined non-notification state is a state in which the special combination is won and the predetermined notification is being performed.

According to the feature B8, when the special role is won, the predetermined stop result is displayed based on the operation of the stop operation means in the predetermined stop mode, and it is specified based on the operation of the stop operation means in the specific stop mode. In the configuration in which the stop result is displayed, a special notification is executed that enables the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in a predetermined stop mode when winning the special combination in a predetermined notification target situation. A predetermined notification is executed that allows the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in a specific stop mode when a special winning combination is won in a specific notification target situation. As a result, it is possible to vary the type of stop result prompting the stop display in the situation when the special role is won. In this case, a stop operation is performed in a predetermined stop mode in a situation where a predetermined notification is being executed that allows the player to recognize that the player should operate the stop operation means in the specific stop mode after winning the special combination in the specific notification target situation. When the means is operated and a predetermined stop result is displayed, a predetermined display notification is executed. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that a stop result different from the stop result to be reported has been displayed.

Feature B9. Predetermined profit giving means ( A function of executing the process of step S1610 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment);
Specified profit giving means ( A function of executing the process of step S1608 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment);
with
The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the predetermined profit is more advantageous to the player than the specific profit.

According to feature B9, when a predetermined stop result corresponding to the granting of a predetermined profit with a relatively high degree of advantage is displayed in a specific notification target situation in which a specific profit with a relatively low degree of advantage can be awarded, the predetermined stop result is displayed. Display notification is executed. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize that the object to which the profit is given is not the predetermined profit.

Feature B10. Specific display notification based on the display of the specific stop result by operating the stop operation means in the specific stop mode even though the special combination is won and the special notification is executed in the predetermined notification target situation. (3rd irregular notification sound in the third embodiment) is provided (function to execute the processing of step S1806 of the main side MPU 72 in the third embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature B8 or B9.

According to feature B10, in a situation where a special notice is being executed to enable the player to recognize that a special winning combination should be won in a predetermined notification target situation and the player should operate the stop operation means in a predetermined stop mode, in a specific stop mode. When the stop operation means is operated and the specific stop result is displayed, the specific display notification is executed. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that a stop result different from the stop result to be reported has been displayed.

Any one or more of features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, and features E1 to E7 may be applied to the features B1 to B10. good. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. a pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of pattern display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets the game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the game is executed;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern display for controlling the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is regarded as establishment of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination. Winning response control means for executing corresponding control (function for executing medium provision processing and response processing at the end of the game in the main side MPU 72);
In a game machine equipped with
As a role to be elected in the lottery process of the above role,
A first stop result (a combination of "red 7" patterns in the second and third embodiments) can be displayed when the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order. 1 role (index value IV = 17 in the second and third embodiments),
When the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in the predetermined stop order, the first stop result can be displayed, and when the first stop result is not displayed, the second stop result (second 2, a combination of "BAR" symbols in the third embodiment) that can be displayed (index value IV = 18 in the second and third embodiments);
is set.

According to the feature C1, when the first combination is won, the first stop result can be displayed when the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order, and the second combination is won. In this case, when the variable display of patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order, the first stop result can be displayed, and when the first stop result is not displayed, the second stop result can be displayed. becomes. Thus, when the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined order in a predetermined situation, the second combination is used to display the second stop result. It is possible to increase the probability that the first stop result can be displayed when the variable display of patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order in a situation different from the situation of (1). If the probability of winning the first combination is set to a predetermined probability so that the probability of being able to display the first stop result is set to a predetermined probability, the first combination will be won with a predetermined probability even in the predetermined situation. However, since the first stop result can be displayed even when the second winning combination is won as described above, the first stop result can be displayed in a situation different from the above-mentioned predetermined situation. While setting the probability to a predetermined probability, it is possible to set the probability that the first stop result can be displayed in the predetermined situation to be lower than the predetermined probability. And it becomes possible to produce such an effect by using the second combination that enables the second stop result to be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the game preferably performed.

Feature C2. The pattern display control means, when the first winning combination or the second winning combination is won, the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of the pattern display areas is stopped in the predetermined stop order. It is possible to display the first stop result when the stop operation means is operated at the first operation timing (timing aiming at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML), and the second combination is performed. In the case of winning, when the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in the predetermined stop order, and at the second operation timing (the timing at which the "BAR" pattern is aimed on the main line ML). The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the second stop result can be displayed when the stop operation means is operated.

According to the feature C2, when the first combination or the second combination is won, the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order, and the stop operation means is operated at the first operation timing. When operated, the first stop result is displayed, and when the second combination is won, the variable display of patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order, and the stop operation means is operated at the second operation timing. A second stop result is displayed if the Thereby, when the second winning combination is won and the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in the predetermined stop order, the first stop result can be displayed and the first stop result is not displayed. In the configuration in which the second stop result can be displayed at the end, it is possible to change the stop result to be displayed between the first stop result and the second stop result depending on the operation timing of the stop operation means.

Feature C3. A plurality of said symbols, regardless of whether the first winning combination is won in the first notification target situation (the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4) or the second winning combination is won in the first notification target situation. Stopping the variable display of the pattern in the display area in the predetermined stop order, and executing a first notification for allowing the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated at the first operation timing. 1 notification control means (the function of executing the processing of steps S1406 to S1408 and steps S1410 to S1411 of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1502 of the effect side MPU 92);
When the second winning combination is won in the second notification target situation (the second half situation of the pseudo-bonus state ST4), the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of the pattern display areas is stopped in the predetermined stop order, and at the second operation timing. A second notification control means for executing a second notification that allows the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated (the process of steps S1412 to S1413 of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment function to execute the processing of step S1504 of the effect side MPU 92);
The gaming machine according to feature C2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature C3, in the first notification target situation, the variable display of patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order regardless of whether the first prize is won or the second prize is won. At the same time, the first notification is executed so that the player can recognize that the stop operation means should be operated at the first operation timing. As a result, it is possible to display the first stop result regardless of whether the player wins the first combination or wins the second combination in the first notification target situation. On the other hand, in the second notification target situation, when the second winning combination is won, the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order, and the stop operation means is operated at the second operation timing. A second notification is performed that makes it recognizable to the person. This makes it possible to display the second stop result when the second combination is won in the second notification target situation.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the first notification control means executes the first notification when the first combination is won in the second notification target situation.

According to feature C4, since the first notification is executed when the first combination is won not only in the first notification target situation but also in the second notification target situation, the first combination is won in the first notification target situation. It is possible to display the first stop result when the In other words, the probability that the first stop result can be displayed in the first notification target situation is the sum of the winning probabilities of the first and second hands, whereas the first stop result is displayed in the second notification target situation. The probability that the result can be displayed corresponds to the winning probability of the first combination, and the probability that the second stop result can be displayed corresponds to the winning probability of the second combination.

Feature C5. In the first notification target situation, it is either the case where the first winning combination is won and the first stop result is displayed or the second winning combination is won and the first stop result is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature C3 or C4, wherein the same first profit (adding 1 to the value of the transition advantage counter in the main side RAM 74) is awarded to the player.

According to feature C5, in the first notification target situation, the first winning combination is won and the first stop result is displayed, or the second winning combination is won and the first stop result is displayed. Since the same first profit is awarded to the player in both cases, the first stop result is displayed regardless of whether the first winning combination or the second winning combination is won in the first notification target situation. In the configuration in which the player's stop operation is performed as described above, it is possible to make the advantage of displaying the first stop result in the first notification target situation constant.

Feature C6. First profit giving means (second implementation) for giving the first profit to the player regardless of whether the first winning combination or the second winning combination is won in the first notification target situation The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C5, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of steps S1604 and S1608 of the main side MPU 72 in the form).

According to feature C6, if the player wins the first or second hand in the first notification target situation, the first profit is awarded to the player regardless of the stop result after the variable display of the pattern. It is possible to prevent the provision of the first profit from disappearing due to a mistake in the stop operation.

Feature C7. A second benefit (transition in the main side RAM 74 The second profit giving means (the function of executing the process of step S1610 of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment) for giving the player the value of the time advantage counter by 2). The gaming machine according to C5 or C6.

According to feature C7, the second benefit is given to the player by the occurrence of the second target event, which is either winning the second winning combination or displaying the second stop result in the second notification target situation. , the player expects the second target event to occur in the second notification target situation.

Feature C8. The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein the second profit is more advantageous to the player than the first profit.

According to feature C8, since the second profit is more advantageous to the player than the first profit, winning the first or second hand in the first notification target situation or The player expects the second target event to occur in the second notification target situation rather than the display of the first stop result.

Feature C9. As the plurality of pattern display regions, a left pattern display region (left reel 32L), a middle pattern display region (middle reel 32M), and a right pattern display region (right reel 32R) are provided,
Characteristic features C1 to C1, characterized in that the pattern display area to be stopped first in the predetermined stop order is a predetermined pattern display area (right reel 32R) other than the left side pattern display area. The gaming machine according to any one of C8.

According to the feature C9, even if the first combination is won, the first stop result is not displayed unless the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined pattern display area other than the left side pattern display area is stopped first, and the second combination is displayed. Even if the player wins the prize, the first stop result and the second stop result are not displayed unless the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined pattern display area other than the left side pattern display area is stopped first. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the first stop result and the second stop result will be displayed in a situation where the stop order of the variable display of patterns is not notified.

Any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, and features E1 to E7 may be applied to the features C1 to C9. good. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each invention of the characteristic group B and the characteristic group C can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a storage section for storing game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and directed to a game area in response to a player's shooting operation. is fired. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. be.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals is betted and a new game is started by operating a start lever, a lottery process is executed by a control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary that the game be played favorably, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Display means (image display device 63 in fourth and fifth embodiments) having a display section (liquid crystal display section 63a in fourth and fifth embodiments);
Display storage means (memory module 101 in the fourth and fifth embodiments) storing image data in advance;
Drawing data is set in the setting storage area (the first frame area 106a and the second frame area 106b in the fourth and fifth embodiments) using the image data, and the image signal corresponding to the drawing data is generated as described above. Display control means (the production side MPU 92 and VDP 103 in the fourth and fifth embodiments) for displaying an image on the display unit based on the output to the display means;
with
The display control means controls, in the setting storage area, a first setting area (first divided area DA1 when divided into two) corresponding to the first display area (left area A1) in the display section, and the setting storage area. , predetermined corresponding images (animation displays G21, G22 for effect, addition Predetermined drawing execution means (steps S2502 to S2505 of the VDP 103 in the fourth embodiment are executed to set predetermined drawing data (image data D1 at the time of division) to enable display of number notification display G23). a function of executing the processing of steps S2602 to S2606 of the VDP 103 in the fifth embodiment).

According to feature D1, by setting predetermined drawing data in each of the first setting area and the second setting area in the setting storage area, the first display area and the second display area in the display section correspond to each other in a predetermined manner. An image is displayed. As a result, when the predetermined corresponding image is displayed in each of the first display area and the second display area on the display section, the same predetermined corresponding image is displayed in each of the first set area and the second set area using the same image data. All you have to do is set the drawing data. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform display on the display means.

Feature D2. The predetermined drawing execution means is copy execution means for copying the predetermined drawing data to the second set area (the function of executing the processing of step S2505 of the VDP 103 in the fourth embodiment, the step S2505 of the VDP 103 in the fifth embodiment). function of executing the processing of S2606).

According to feature D2, the predetermined drawing data is set in the second setting area by copying the predetermined drawing data in the second setting area. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load compared to a configuration in which predetermined drawing data is set using image data for each of the first set area and the second set area.

Feature D3. The predetermined drawing execution means includes means for setting the predetermined drawing data in the first setting area using the image data (function for executing the processing of step S2504 of the VDP 103 in the fourth embodiment),
The game machine according to feature D2, wherein the copy executing means copies the predetermined drawing data set in the first set area to the second set area.

According to feature D3, the predetermined drawing data is set in the second setting area by copying the predetermined drawing data set in the first setting area using the image data to the second setting area. This makes it possible to set the predetermined drawing data in the second setting process using the predetermined drawing data set in the first setting area.

Feature D4. The predetermined drawing executing means is means for setting the predetermined drawing data in a storage area (development buffer 105) different from the setting storage area (step S2604 of the VDP 103 in the fifth embodiment) using the image data. function to execute the processing of
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the copy executing means copies the predetermined drawing data set in the different storage areas to the first set area and the second set area.

According to feature D4, predetermined drawing data is set using image data in a storage area different from the setting storage area, and the set predetermined drawing data is copied to each of the first setting area and the second setting area. be done. As a result, it is possible to create the predetermined drawing data to be copied to the first setting area and the second setting area without executing the drawing process to the setting storage area.

Feature D5. The display control means displays the same content in each of the first display area and the second display area in addition to displaying the predetermined corresponding image in each of the first display area and the second display area. Different correspondence drawing that makes it possible to display different corresponding images (remaining continuous game number image G31, acquired number display image G32, remaining awarded number display image G33, stop order notification image G34, and operation notification image G35) Data (image data D2 corresponding to the remaining continuous game number image G31, image data D3 corresponding to the acquired number display image G32, image data D4 corresponding to the remaining awarded number display image G33, image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 and image data D5 corresponding to the operation notification image G35) in the setting storage area (the function of executing the processing of steps S2506 to S2513 of the VDP 103 in the fourth embodiment; The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of steps S2607 to S2614 of the VDP 103 in the form.

According to the feature D5, while displaying predetermined corresponding images in each of the first display area and the second display area, different correspondences that are not images displayed with the same content in each of the first display area and second display area are displayed. An image can be displayed.

Feature D6. The different correspondence setting means sets the setting area including the first setting area and the second setting area so that the different correspondence image is displayed in the display area including the first display area and the second display area. The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the different corresponding drawing data is set.

According to the feature D6, since the different corresponding image is displayed in the display area including the first display area and the second display area, the first display area and the second display area are divided, but the display is not bound by the division. It is possible to do

Feature D7. The different correspondence setting means sets the different correspondence to the set area including the first set area and the second set area after the predetermined drawing data is set in each of the first set area and the second set area. The gaming machine according to feature D6, characterized by setting drawing data.

According to feature D7, after predetermined drawing data is set in each of the first set region and the second set region, different corresponding drawing data is set in the set region including the first set region and the second set region. , a different corresponding image is displayed in front of the predetermined corresponding image displayed in each of the first display area and the second display area so as not to be constrained by the division of the first display area and the second display area. . As a result, the predetermined corresponding image displayed in each of the first display area and the second display area and the different corresponding image displayed so as not to be constrained by the division of the first display area and the second display area respectively. can be brought to attention.

Feature D8. The display control means stores specific drawing data that enables a specific correspondence image to be displayed in a display area including the first set area and the second set area. 27(a) to 27(c) in the VDP 103). .

According to the feature D8, it is possible to generate a display period during which the specific correspondence image is displayed in a situation where the partitioning of the first display area and the second display area is not performed.

Any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, and features E1 to E7 may be applied to the features D1 to D8. good. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1. Display means (image display device 63 in fourth and fifth embodiments) having a display section (liquid crystal display section 63a in fourth and fifth embodiments);
Display control means for displaying an image on the display unit (the production side MPU 92 and VDP 103 in the fourth and fifth embodiments);
with
The display control means controls the display unit to have a plurality of display areas (left area A1 and right area A2 when split into two, upper left area A11, upper right area A12, lower left area A13 and lower left area A13 when split into four). lower right area A14), and in each of the plurality of display areas, partition side images (animation displays G21 and G22 for effect and grant number notification display G23 when divided into two, and when divided into four In a state where animation displays G41 and G42 for effect and award number notification display G43) are displayed, different corresponding images (remaining continuous game number image G31, Section corresponding control means for controlling the display means to display an acquired number display image G32, a remaining given number display image G33, a stop order notification image G34, and an operation notification image G35) (fourth and fifth embodiments) and a function of executing a display control process for the additional period of the effect side MPU 92 and a function of executing the drawing process of the divided image of the VDP 103).

According to the feature E1, in a state in which the partition side image is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas partitioned on the display unit, the corresponding image is not an image displayed with the same content in each of the plurality of display areas. is displayed. As a result, while drawing attention to the section-side images displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, display contents different from these section-side images are provided by separate corresponding images displayed independently of the plurality of display areas. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform display on the display means.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the different corresponding image is displayed as if it exists in front of the plurality of display areas.

According to feature E2, in a configuration in which a separate corresponding image is displayed in a state in which a partition side image is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, the corresponding separate corresponding image exists in front of the plurality of display areas. is displayed, it is possible to make the different correspondence image stand out.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the different correspondence image is displayed across a plurality of display areas so as to straddle boundaries of the plurality of display areas.

According to feature E3, the partition-side image is displayed within the range of each display area, while the different corresponding image is displayed across a plurality of display areas so as to straddle the boundaries of the plurality of display areas. be. This makes it possible to display the different correspondence image in a size larger than the partition side image.

Feature E4. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the different correspondence image is an image for notifying the player of predetermined content.

According to the feature E4, the different correspondence image for informing the player of the predetermined content is displayed independently without being limited to a plurality of display areas, so that the predetermined content can be preferably notified. It becomes possible.

Feature E5. The display control means, based on the operation of the operation means (manipulation device 121 for effect) during the effective period of operation, provides a post-operation image (applied number notification display G23 in the case of 2-split, giving number notification display G43) is displayed on the display unit (function for performing display shown in FIG. 43(c) or FIG. 44(c) in VDP 103),
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the different correspondence image is an image that allows the player to recognize that the operation means should be operated during the operation valid period.

According to feature E5, the different correspondence image that allows the player to recognize that the operation means should be operated during the valid operation period is independently displayed without being limited to a plurality of display areas. , it is possible to appropriately notify that the operation means should be operated.

Feature E6. Any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the number of the display areas displayed as the plurality of display areas is different between the first display state (during splitting into two) and the second display state (during splitting into four). The gaming machine described in .

According to feature E6, since the number of display areas displayed as the plurality of display areas differs between the first display state and the second display state, the partition side image is displayed using the plurality of display regions. It is possible to diversify the display contents in the case of

Feature E7. The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the section-side images in each of the plurality of display areas are displayed using the same image data.

According to feature E7, since the division-side images in each of the plurality of display areas are displayed using the same image data, it is possible to display the division-side images while reducing the processing load.

Any one or more of features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, and features E1 to E7 may be applied to the features E1 to E7. good. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each invention of the characteristic group D and the characteristic group E can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a storage section for storing game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and directed to a game area in response to a player's shooting operation. is fired. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. be.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals is betted and a new game is started by operating a start lever, a lottery process is executed by a control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to display in a suitable manner on the display means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: The rotation of the rotating body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the rotating body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player responds to the pattern after the stop. A game machine that gives benefits to

10... Slot machine 31... Reel unit 32L... Left reel 32M... Center reel 32R... Right reel 41... Start lever 42 to 44... Stop button 63... Image display device 63a... Liquid crystal display unit 72 Main MPU 74 Main RAM 74e AT continuation counter 92 Rendering MPU 101 Memory module 103 VDP 105 Expansion buffer 106a First frame area 106b Second frame Area 121 Operation device for presentation A1 Left area A2 Right area A11 Upper left area A12 Upper right area A13 Lower left area A14 Lower right area D1 Divided image Data D2 to D5...Image data DA1...First partitioned area DA2...Second partitioned area G21, G22...Animation display for effects G23...Addition number notification display G31...Remaining continuous game number image G32... Acquisition number display image, G33... Remaining number display image, G34... Stop order notification image, G35... Operation notification image, G41, G42... Animation display for effect, G43... Grant number notification display.

Claims (1)

information updating means for updating the continuation criterion information stored in the continuation criterion storing means so as to bring it closer to end information on the basis that the game is executed in an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player and an update opportunity is generated;
terminating means for terminating the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the continuation criterion information becomes the termination information;
State continuation means for continuing the advantageous game state without terminating the advantageous game state by the termination means even if the continuation reference information becomes the end information when a predetermined performance execution situation exists in the advantageous game state. and,
means for updating the continuation reference information so as to move away from the end information based on the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity in the advantageous gaming state;
Although the continuation reference information has become the end information in the advantageous gaming state, if the predetermined opportunity occurs in the situation where the advantageous gaming state is continued due to the predetermined effect execution situation, the predetermined opportunity means for generating a notification corresponding to the fact that the continuation reference information has been updated to a side away from the end information in response to the generation, when the predetermined performance execution situation ends;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images